Sei sulla pagina 1di 193

General Motors Corporation

Worldwide Facilities Group

Electrical Installation Standard EI-1


for Buildings and Facilities

July, 2006
Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

COMMITTEE ON ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION STANDARD EI-1

AUTHORS SPONSORING GROUP


Worldwide Facilities Group-Capital
NAME ORGANIZATION
Projects
David Wilker Body Shop Execution
Tim Peters CCRW Body Conveyors FORWARD QUESTIONS AND
Mark Sowers CCRW-CCB1 Tool Bid COMMENTS TO:
Standards
Ron Shade CCRW-Common and Adv Sys Worldwide Facilities Group-Capital
Joseph Lewandowski CCRW-Controls Architecture Projects
Frank Borin CCRW-GA Controls General Motors Corporation
James Brooks CCRW-Paint Controls Mail Code 483-520-195
Ken Kramer CCRW-Paint Controls PCC Central
2000 Centerpoint Pkwy.
Greg Beaudry CCRW-Press Controls
Pontiac, MI 48341-3147
Edward Roelant CCRW-Safety
Danny Griffin GA Execution
Attn.: Wayne E. Combs
Mark Vogel GA Execution wayne.e.combs@gm.com
Jeffrey Osowksi IS&S
Michael Bukowski Powertrain -Controls DOCUMENT EXPIRATION DATE
Wayne Combs WFG-CP
Patrice Fields WFG-CP This document will expire five years from
Richard Frederick WFG-CP its date of issue. It may be revised,
James Konkle WFG-CP reaffirmed or withdrawn prior to this date.
Bob McIntyre WFG-CP Contact the organization listed above for
Tim Stork WFG-CP the latest version.
Tony Tomaino WFG-CP
Steve Townsend WFG-CP For additional copies:
Bill Harris WFG-CP Within GM: Socrates, WFG Capital
Bob Cleghorn WFG-SAFETY Projects
Mike Hittel WFG-E&US Homepage, Reference Materials
John Mentzer WFG-E&US
Tim Hoxie WFG-FM Outside of GM: www.gmsupplypower.com
Bob Ingham WFG-FM
Robert McFarland, Jr. WFG-FM
Jeffrey Richland WFG-FM
Patrick Tyus WFG-FM
Doug Bolduc WFG-FM – Canada
Rene Ontiveros WFG-FM – Mexico

DOCUMENT REVISIONS:

DATE REVISION BY REVISION SUMMARY


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................... 1


1.1 PURPOSE .............................................................................................................. 1
1.2 SCOPE ................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 UTILIZING THIS STANDARD ................................................................................ 2
1.4 COMPLIANCE WITH OTHER CODES................................................................... 3
1.5 MANDATORY AND PREFERRED ITEMS ............................................................. 3
1.6 PURCHASING DIVISION REQUIREMENTS, APPROVAL, AND DEVIATIONS .... 3
1.7 CONSENSUS STANDARDS AND REVISIONS ..................................................... 4
1.8 UNDERWRITERS’ LABORATORIES APPROVAL (UL) AND APPROVAL FROM
OTHER QUALIFIED TESTING LABORATORIES ............................................... 4
1.9 ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ............................................... 4
1.10 MANUFACTURERS’ NAMES AND PRODUCTS ................................................... 4
1.11 DOCUMENTATION ................................................................................................ 4
2. MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND LOADCENTER SUBSTATION EQUIPMENT 7
2.1 GENERAL .............................................................................................................. 7
2.2 TEMPORARY STORAGE ...................................................................................... 7
2.3 ACCESSIBILITY AND REMOVAL ......................................................................... 7
2.4 FIELD INSTALLATION .......................................................................................... 8
2.5 PHASING AND IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................... 9
2.6 TRANSFORMERS ................................................................................................. 9
2.7 INCOMING AND TIE BUSWAY ............................................................................. 9
2.7.1 General ............................................................................................... 10
2.7.2 Medium Voltage Incoming and Tie Busway ......................................... 10
2.8 SUBSTATION ROOM TOOL CABINETS............................................................. 11
2.9 HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTORS............................................................................ 12
2.10 HOIST UNIT ......................................................................................................... 12
2.11 DIAGRAM BOARDS ............................................................................................ 13
3. LOW VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) .......................................... 16
3.1 BUSWAY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS.................................................................. 16
3.1.1 General ............................................................................................... 16
3.1.2 Enclosed Busway ................................................................................ 16
3.1.3 Industrial Trolley Busway..................................................................... 18
3.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES (FUSED AND NON-FUSED) .................................... 19
3.3 POWER RECEPTACLES (480 VOLTS)............................................................... 19
3.4 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS AND CONTROL PANEL ENCLOSURES .......... 20
3.4.1 General ............................................................................................... 20
3.4.2 Handling .............................................................................................. 20
3.4.3 Storage ............................................................................................... 21
3.4.4 Location and Installation ...................................................................... 21
3.5 COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS AND WALL MOUNTED PANEL
ENCLOSURES .................................................................................................. 22

Template Revised 5-06 Page i EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

3.5.1 General ............................................................................................... 22


3.5.2 Location and Installation ...................................................................... 23
3.6 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS (FIXED CAPACITORS) ......... 23
3.7 PANELBOARDS .................................................................................................. 24
3.8 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS AND MINI-LOAD CENTERS............................... 25
3.9 WIRING DEVICES................................................................................................ 26
3.10 LUMINAIRES ....................................................................................................... 26
3.10.1 General ............................................................................................... 27
3.10.2 Fluorescent Luminaires ....................................................................... 27
3.10.3 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Luminaires .......................................... 28
3.10.4 Incandescent Luminaires..................................................................... 28
3.10.5 Exterior Luminaires ............................................................................. 28
3.10.6 Exit Lights............................................................................................ 29
3.10.7 Lamps ................................................................................................. 29
4. RACEWAY AND CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS ................................................................... 30
4.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 30
4.2 CONDUIT SYSTEMS ........................................................................................... 31
4.2.1 Exposed Conduit ................................................................................. 31
4.2.2 Concealed Work .................................................................................. 32
4.2.3 Conduit Applications ............................................................................ 33
4.2.4 Rigid Steel Conduit: Type RMC ........................................................... 34
4.2.5 Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Type RMC ................................................... 34
4.2.6 Plastic Jacketed Rigid Steel Conduit: Type RMC ................................ 34
4.2.7 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: Type RNC ................................................. 35
4.2.8 Intermediate Metal Conduit: Type IMC ................................................ 36
4.2.9 Electrical Metallic Tubing: Type EMT ................................................... 36
4.2.10 Flexible Metal Conduit: Type FMC....................................................... 37
4.2.11 Liquidtight Flexible Conduit: Types LFMC and LFNC .......................... 37
4.2.11.1 General................................................................................................ 37
4.2.11.2 Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Type LFMC ..................................... 38
4.2.11.3 Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit: Type LFNC ............................ 38
4.2.12 Conduit Bodies and Fittings ................................................................. 38
4.2.13 Outlet, Switch, and Device Boxes........................................................ 39
4.2.14 Junction and Pull Boxes ...................................................................... 41
4.3 BOX SUPPORTS ................................................................................................. 41
4.4 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY ............................................................................ 42
4.5 METAL WIREWAYS ............................................................................................ 42
4.6 CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS..................................................................................... 43
4.6.1 General ............................................................................................... 43
4.6.2 Cable Tray (Low Voltage) .................................................................... 46
4.6.3 Cable Tray (Medium Voltage) .............................................................. 46
4.6.4 Trough Tray Cable Tray System.......................................................... 46
4.6.5 Basket Tray Cable Tray System (Communications and Low Voltage) . 46

Template Revised 5-06 Page ii EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.6.6 Cable Transits ..................................................................................... 48


4.7 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) ........... 48
4.7.1 General ............................................................................................... 48
4.7.2 Excavation and Backfilling ................................................................... 49
4.7.3 Cinder Fill ............................................................................................ 50
4.7.4 Testing Conduit for Obstructions ......................................................... 50
4.7.5 Empty Conduit..................................................................................... 50
4.7.6 Vertical Conduit Risers ........................................................................ 51
4.7.7 Underground Duct Banks (Concrete Encased) .................................... 51
4.7.8 Direct Burial Conduit............................................................................ 52
4.7.9 Handholes ........................................................................................... 52
4.7.9.1 General................................................................................................ 52
4.7.9.2 Precast Handholes............................................................................... 53
4.7.9.3 Cast-in-place Handholes ...................................................................... 53
4.7.10 Handhole Waterproofing...................................................................... 54
4.7.11 Handhole Cable Racks ........................................................................ 55
5. MEDIUM VOLTAGE WIRING (ABOVE 600 VOLTS) ..................................................... 56
5.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 56
5.2 CABLE REEL IDENTIFICATION ......................................................................... 56
5.3 CABLE TYPES .................................................................................................... 56
5.4 MINIMUM BENDING RADII ................................................................................. 57
5.5 HANDLING AND INSTALLATION OF CABLES .................................................. 57
5.5.1 General ............................................................................................... 57
5.5.2 Cable Installation in Tray ..................................................................... 59
5.5.3 Underground ....................................................................................... 60
5.6 TERMINATIONS AND SPLICES.......................................................................... 60
5.6.1 General ............................................................................................... 60
5.6.2 Terminations ....................................................................................... 61
5.6.3 Splices ................................................................................................ 62
5.7 FIREPROOFING OF CABLES ............................................................................. 63
5.8 IDENTIFICATION OF CABLES ............................................................................ 63
5.9 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE TAP BOXES .......................................................... 63
6. LOW VOLTAGE WIRING (600 VOLTS AND BELOW) .................................................. 64
6.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 64
6.2 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE ............................................................................ 65
6.2.1 Applications ......................................................................................... 65
6.2.2 Color Coding ....................................................................................... 65
6.2.3 Motor and Control Wire Identification................................................... 66
6.3 CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING .............................................................................. 66
6.4 WIRING FOR SPECIAL TEMPERATURE APPLICATIONS ................................ 66
6.5 PORTABLE CORDS ............................................................................................ 66
6.6 METAL-CLAD CABLE ......................................................................................... 67
6.7 MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS ............................................................... 68

Template Revised 5-06 Page iii EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

6.8 BUS DROP CABLE ............................................................................................. 69


6.8.1 General ............................................................................................... 69
6.8.2 Bus Drop Cable Support...................................................................... 69
6.9 EXPOSED RUN TRAY CABLE AND CABLE TRAY SYSTEM ............................ 70
6.10 INTERLOCKED ARMORED CABLE AND CABLE TRAY SYSTEM.................... 70
6.11 VOLTAGE DROP ................................................................................................. 71
6.12 TERMINATIONS, PHASING AND IDENTIFICATION .......................................... 71
6.13 SPLICES AND TAPS ........................................................................................... 72
6.13.1 General ............................................................................................... 72
6.13.2 Connectors .......................................................................................... 72
6.13.3 Insulation ............................................................................................. 73
7. FUSES ........................................................................................................................... 76
7.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 76
7.2 MEDIUM VOLTAGE FUSES (601 VOLTS TO 35,000 VOLTS) ............................ 76
7.3 LOW VOLTAGE FUSES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW).......................................... 77
7.3.1 General ............................................................................................... 77
7.3.2 Fuse Applications ................................................................................ 77
8. GROUNDING ................................................................................................................. 79
8.1 DEFINITIONS ....................................................................................................... 79
8.1.1 General ............................................................................................... 79
8.1.2 System Grounding............................................................................... 79
8.1.3 Equipment Grounding.......................................................................... 79
8.1.4 Static Grounding.................................................................................. 79
8.1.5 Lightning Protection Grounding ........................................................... 80
8.1.6 Basic Ground ...................................................................................... 80
8.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS............................................................................... 80
8.2.1 Grounds Rods ..................................................................................... 81
8.2.2 Concrete-Encased Electrodes (Ufer Ground) ...................................... 81
8.2.3 Bonding Jumpers ................................................................................ 82
8.2.4 Taps .................................................................................................... 82
8.2.5 Building Frame Grounding ................................................................... 82
8.3 SYSTEM GROUNDING ........................................................................................ 83
8.4 OBJECTIONABLE CURRENTS .......................................................................... 83
8.5 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING ................................................................................. 83
8.5.1 General ............................................................................................... 83
8.5.2 Outdoor Switchgear and Loadcenter Substations ................................ 83
8.5.3 Indoor Switchgear and Loadcenter Substations................................... 84
8.5.4 Underground System........................................................................... 85
8.5.5 Medium Voltage Utilization Equipment ................................................ 85
8.5.6 Low Voltage Utilization Equipment ...................................................... 85
8.5.7 Elpo Dip Tank System Grounding........................................................ 86
8.5.8 Computer and Telecommunications Equipment Room and Plant Floor
Cabinet ................................................................................................ 87

Template Revised 5-06 Page iv EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

8.5.9 Grounding of Communication Cables .................................................. 87


8.6 STATIC GROUNDING.......................................................................................... 87
8.7 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GROUNDING ........................................................... 88
9. FASTENERS AND SUPPORTS ..................................................................................... 94
9.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 94
9.2 BEAM CLAMPS AND CONDUIT HANGERS ....................................................... 94
9.3 ANCHORS ........................................................................................................... 95
9.4 TOGGLE BOLTS ................................................................................................. 95
9.5 MISCELLANEOUS FASTENERS AND SUPPORTS ........................................... 95
9.6 FINISH OF HARDWARE ...................................................................................... 95
9.7 DETAILS .............................................................................................................. 96
10. CONSTRUCTION IN HAZARDOUS AREAS ............................................................... 113
10.1 CONSTRUCTION, INSTALLATION, EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS .............. 113
10.2 CLASS I, DIVISIONS 1 AND 2 LOCATIONS ..................................................... 114
10.3 CLASS II, DIVISIONS 1 AND 2 LOCATIONS .................................................... 114
10.4 CLASS III DIVISIONS 1 AND 2 LOCATIONS .................................................... 114
10.5 CLASS 1, ZONE 0, 1, AND 2 LOCATIONS ....................................................... 114
10.6 INTRINSICALLY SAFE SYSTEMS .................................................................... 114
10.7 MISCELLANEOUS CONSIDERATIONS ............................................................ 114
11. PAINTING, IDENTIFICATION, ARC FLASH AND LOCKOUT ENERGY CONTROL .. 116
11.1 PAINTING .......................................................................................................... 116
11.2 IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................................... 116
11.2.1 General ............................................................................................. 116
11.2.2 Mounting ........................................................................................... 117
11.2.3 Equipment Nameplates and Tags...................................................... 117
11.2.4 Hazard Identification for Equipment ................................................... 120
11.2.5 Switchgear and Substation Room Doors ........................................... 120
11.3 ARC FLASH LABELS ........................................................................................ 120
11.4 LOCKOUT ENERGY CONTROL ....................................................................... 121
11.4.1 General ............................................................................................. 121
11.4.2 Definitions ......................................................................................... 121
11.4.3 Energy-Isolating Devices ................................................................... 121
11.4.4 Lockout Placards ............................................................................... 122
12. INSPECTIONS AND FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTS.................................................... 129
12.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................... 129
12.1.1 Scope ................................................................................................ 129
12.1.2 Definitions ......................................................................................... 129
12.1.3 Responsibility .................................................................................... 129
12.1.4 Safety and Precautions ..................................................................... 130
12.2 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 131
12.2.1 Test Report ....................................................................................... 131
12.2.2 High Potential Tests .......................................................................... 131
12.2.3 Insulation Resistance Tests ............................................................... 131

Template Revised 5-06 Page v EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

12.2.4 Phase Tests ...................................................................................... 133


12.3 MEDIUM AND LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND METAL CLAD AIR
SWITCHES ...................................................................................................... 134
12.3.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections .................................................... 134
12.3.2 Electrical Tests .................................................................................. 135
12.3.3 Assistance to Equipment Manufacturer’s Service Engineer ............... 135
12.4 TRANSFORMERS ............................................................................................. 135
12.4.1 Loadcenter Substation Transformers................................................. 135
12.4.1.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections ..................................................... 135
12.4.1.2 Assistance to Equipment Manufacturer’s Service Engineer................. 136
12.4.2 Transformers (600 Volts and Below) ................................................. 136
12.5 CIRCUIT BREAKERS ........................................................................................ 136
12.5.1 Medium Voltage – Air Magnetic and Vacuum .................................... 136
12.5.1.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections ..................................................... 136
12.5.1.2 Electrical Tests .................................................................................. 137
12.5.2 Low Voltage (600 Volts and Below) ................................................... 137
12.5.2.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections ..................................................... 137
12.5.2.2 Electrical Tests .................................................................................. 137
12.6 PROTECTIVE RELAYS AND CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP UNITS....................... 137
12.7 CABLES ............................................................................................................. 138
12.7.1 Medium Voltage Cables .................................................................... 138
12.7.1.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections ..................................................... 138
12.7.1.2 Electrical Tests .................................................................................. 138
12.7.2 Low Voltage Cables (600 Volts and Below) ....................................... 140
12.7.2.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections ..................................................... 140
12.7.2.2 Electrical Tests .................................................................................. 140
12.8 METAL ENCLOSED BUSWAYS ....................................................................... 141
12.8.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections .................................................... 141
12.8.2 Electrical Tests .................................................................................. 141
12.9 ROTATING EQUIPMENT ................................................................................... 141
12.9.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections .................................................... 141
12.9.2 Electrical Tests .................................................................................. 142
12.10 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS, MOTOR CONTROLLERS AND CONTROL
EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................... 142
12.10.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections .................................................... 142
12.10.2 Electrical Tests .................................................................................. 142
12.11 HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTORS.......................................................................... 142
12.12 GROUNDING SYSTEMS ................................................................................... 143
12.12.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections .................................................... 143
12.12.2 Electrical Tests .................................................................................. 143
12.12.3 Test Values ....................................................................................... 143
12.12.4 Test Records ..................................................................................... 143

Template Revised 5-06 Page vi EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

APPENDIX A: REFERENCE TO OTHER CODES, STANDARDS, AND SPECIFICATIONS150


APPENDIX B: PURCHASING DIVISION REQUIREMENT LISTING ................................... 155
APPENDIX C: SAMPLE TESTING FORMS ......................................................................... 158
APPENDIX D: GLOSSARY OF TERMS .............................................................................. 167
APPENDIX E: EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................. 163
E3.1 BUSWAY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS................................................................ 163
E3.1.1 General ............................................................................................. 163
E3.1.2 Industrial Trolley Busway................................................................... 163
E3.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES ................................................................................ 164
E3.2.1 General ............................................................................................. 164
E3.2.2 Special Switch Testing Requirements for Manufacturers ................... 166
E3.3 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS ............................................. 167
E3.4 FUSIBLE PANELBOARDS ................................................................................ 168
E3.4.1 General ............................................................................................. 168
E3.5 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS .............................................................. 169
E3.5.1 General ............................................................................................. 169
E3.5.2 Panelboards Rated 277 Volts And Above .......................................... 170
E3.5.3 Panelboards Rated 240 Volts And Below .......................................... 170
E3.5.4 DC Panelboards ................................................................................ 171
E3.5.5 Intelligent Circuit Breaker Panelboards.............................................. 171
E3.6 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS AND MINI-LOAD CENTERS ............................. 172
E3.6.1 Dry-Type Transformers ..................................................................... 172
E3.6.2 Mini-Load Centers ............................................................................. 173
E3.7 WIRING DEVICES.............................................................................................. 173
E3.7.1 Receptacles ...................................................................................... 173
E3.7.2 Switches ............................................................................................ 174
E3.7.3 Cover Plates...................................................................................... 174
E3.8 LUMINAIRES ..................................................................................................... 175
E3.8.1 General ............................................................................................. 175
E3.8.2 Fluorescent Fixtures Luminaires........................................................ 175
E3.8.3 High Intensity Discharge (Hid) Fixtures Luminaires ........................... 175
E3.8.4 Exterior Lighting ................................................................................ 175
E3.8.5 Lamps ............................................................................................... 175

Template Revised 5-06 Page vii EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.1 PURPOSE

1.1.1 The primary purpose of this standard is to provide:


1. Basic electrical equipment, material, and installation specifications for
buildings, facilities, and manufacturing equipment where appropriate, which
can be incorporated in all proposals and contract documents involving
electrical work.
2. Electrical installers with Specifications for performing electrical work called for
in contract documents, and in some instances enumerating the responsibility
of installers when on GM property.
3. GM engineers with an approved standard for electrical construction,
especially where new facilities or modifications to existing facilities are to be
made by plant personnel.
4. GM plant engineers and field engineers with a ready reference for checking
the acceptability of work performed by electrical installers and their
compliance with contract documents.

1.2 SCOPE

1.2.1 The objective of this standard is to provide guide specifications for the design,
construction and installation of electrical systems in an effort to:

1. Enhance safe operation and maintenance of equipment.


2. Promote cost effective installation of material and equipment.
3. Reduce downtime and operating cost by improving equipment reliability and
maintenance.
4. Encourage the implementation of new technology.
5. Provide a common North American divisional and plant electrical installation
standard.

1.2.2 The GM Electrical Installation Standard EI-1 for buildings and facilities is intended
to complement the GM Electrical Equipment Specifications (E-Specs) and the SAE
Standard for Electrical Equipment for Automotive Industrial Machinery, 2002
Edition, SAE HS-1738. Refer to Appendix A, for codes, standards, and
specifications that are included as a guide and as minimum requirements where
not covered by this standard.

1.2.3 The GM Electrical Installation Standard EI-1 for Building and Facilities does not
address unique electrical systems whose installations and specifications vary at
each facility. These unique systems include, but are not limited to the following
systems:

1. Telephone and Data Communication

Template Revised 5-06 Page 1 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

2. Under Carpet Wiring


3. Pipe Heating
4. Snow Melting
5. Railroad Track Derail and Signal
6. Fire Alarm
a. Alarm initiating devices (e.g. flow switches, smoke detectors, etc.)
b. Data gathering centers
c. Alarm notification devices
7. Occupant Emergency Notification
8. Break and Lunch Tone
9. Security
a. Access Control
b. Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) system
c. Central security room equipment
10. Time and Attendance
a. Badge Readers
b. Central computer room equipment
11. Medical
12. Emergency Power and Standby Power

1.2.3.1 Equipment specifications and installation requirements for the above systems will
be specified by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

1.2.4 This standard is not intended to limit or inhibit advancements in engineering


methods, procedures, or technology.

1.2.5 This standard is for new construction and renovations, and should not be
construed as retroactive to existing installations.

1.3 UTILIZING THIS STANDARD

1.3.1 This document is primarily intended for use as an installation document, although
some equipment and material specifications are included. Equipment and material
specifications are included in the main sections of this standard and Appendix E,
which contains the more extensive equipment specifications.

1.3.2 This standard is intended to supplement the contract documents (e.g., scope of
work, specifications, drawings, etc.). All provisions of this standard shall apply to
the contract unless specifically modified by the contract documents.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 2 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

1.3.3 The installer shall become completely familiar with all applicable provisions of this
standard, including the appendices and applicable reference standards and
specifications listed in the Appendices, which are an integral part of this standard.

1.3.4 The installer shall provide a high quality, functional and reliable equipment
installation by referencing the Purchasing Division’s specifications and the
manufacturer’s manuals to become familiar with the equipment design details and
electrical system requirements.

1.3.5 Refer to Appendix D, Glossary of Terms, for definitions.

1.3.6 References to 480-volt material and equipment are intended to refer to 600-volt
class.

1.4 COMPLIANCE WITH OTHER CODES

1.4.1 The GM Electrical Installation Standard EI-1 for Buildings and Facilities is intended
to comply with all national, state, provincial and local codes, as a minimum
requirement, and to exceed them as defined in these specifications.

1.4.2 Local regulations, enacted by city, state, or provincial governments, may differ from
applicable National Electrical Code, Canadian Electrical Code or Mexican Electrical
Code requirements. Therefore, the electrical installer shall be familiar with all these
requirements before starting any work. All work shall be in compliance with the
above requirements.

1.5 MANDATORY AND PREFERRED ITEMS

1.5.1 Equipment and material purchased and installed shall be in accordance with this
standard unless otherwise indicated in the contract documents or by the
Purchasing Division.

1.5.2 The word “shall” is understood as a mandatory requirement; the word “should” as a
recommendation.

1.6 PURCHASING DIVISION REQUIREMENTS, APPROVAL, AND DEVIATIONS

1.6.1 The reference section listing in Appendix B, has been provided in order to make
the Purchasing Division and installer / equipment supplier aware of the specific
items in this standard in which the type of design, product, or system required is
dictated by the Purchasing Division. Where the “PURCHASING DIVISION” is
printed all in italicized capital letters in this standard, the paragraph number is listed
in Appendix B, indicating an option by the Purchasing Division. The Purchasing
Division shall provide this information to the installer/equipment supplier in the bid
documents.

1.6.2 Deviations from this standard shall require the advance written approval of the
PURCHASING DIVISION. Any waiver granted shall apply only to the installation in
question and shall not be considered as permanent.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 3 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

1.7 CONSENSUS STANDARDS AND REVISIONS

1.7.1 Whenever a consensus standard or code is mentioned in this document, it shall be


the latest revision. Refer to Appendix A, for a reference to organizations
responsible for development of consensus standards and codes.

1.8 UNDERWRITERS’ LABORATORIES APPROVAL (UL) AND APPROVAL FROM


OTHER QUALIFIED TESTING LABORATORIES

1.8.1 All electrical material and equipment provided in accordance with this standard
shall be listed by the Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. and each piece or assembly
shall be so labeled. Material and equipment shall be used only under the
conditions for which it is listed.
1.8.1.1 Equipment shall be listed by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA) for
installations in Canada and by the National Association of Standardization and
Certification of the Electrical Sector (ANCE) for installations in Mexico.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTALLY HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

1.9.1 The installer shall consult the Purchasing Division’s environmental engineer for the
proper handling of environmentally hazardous materials.

1.9.2 The use of polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB’s) or higher polyphenyls in any product
is prohibited (i.e., as a dielectric fill in power factor correction capacitors, surge
protection capacitors, capacitors in lighting fixture ballasts, transformer coolants,
etc.).

1.9.3 It is the responsibility of the installer to provide the plant’s Material Coordinator with
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), for all chemical materials the installer and/or
the installer’s subcontractors bring onto the Owner’s Site for the construction
project.

1.10 MANUFACTURERS’ NAMES AND PRODUCTS

1.10.1 Manufacturers’ names and products indicated in this standard are used to
designate type and quality of product. The use of these names herein does not
constitute Purchasing Division approval for any particular contract.

1.11 DOCUMENTATION

1.11.1 The installer shall submit all required documentation to the Purchasing Division.
Documentation shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Shop drawings of all electrical materials and equipment.


2. Working drawings of the proposed electrical installation.
3. As-built drawings of the completed electrical installation.
4. Installation manuals, operating manuals and maintenance manuals for
electrical equipment.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 4 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

5. Test reports in accordance with Section 12, Inspections and Field


Acceptance Test.
6. Documentation of safety lockout procedures.
7. Material safety data sheets.
8. Other documentation as required by the contract documents.

1.11.2 Shop drawings, working drawings and as-built drawings shall be of high quality,
and reproducible. Reproducible media shall be as specified by the PURCHASING
DIVISION. Drawings shall be consecutively numbered as specified by the
PURCHASING DIVISION.

1.11.3 Manufacturer’s shop drawings shall be submitted as soon as possible after award
of contract. Electrical materials and equipment shall not be ordered or fabricated
until the shop drawings have been reviewed and accepted by the Purchasing
Division.

1.11.4 Shop drawings shall be corrected and resubmitted when requested by the
Purchasing Division.

1.11.5 Review and acceptance of documentation by the Purchasing Division shall not
constitute a waiver of responsibility for proper operation of the equipment, nor does
it relieve the supplier of conformance to the contract documents and drawings.

1.11.6 Shop drawings shall include complete identification of manufacturer, project,


equipment, and where the equipment is to be used. The drawings shall be
identified with the Purchasing Division project number, date, project description,
project location and whether the submittal is for the first, second, third, or more
times. Shop drawings shall also include construction details, materials lists, panel
layouts, all dimensions, complete ratings, performance curves, data calculations,
wiring and control diagrams, sequence of operation, UL, CSA, and ANCE labels,
list of any exceptions from specification, and any other information required for the
Purchasing Division to evaluate the system or equipment.

1.11.7 Shop drawings for electrical equipment shall comply with the requirements of the
SAE Standard for Electrical Equipment for Automotive Industrial Machinery, 2002
Edition, SAE HS-1738.

1.11.8 Working drawings of the proposed electrical installation shall be submitted, unless
otherwise specified by the PURCHASING DIVISION. Working drawings shall
include complete plans and details with dimensioned locations of equipment and
devices, elevations, mounting details, circuiting, conduit and wire sizes elevation
and routing of raceways, sizes and rating of equipment, and other pertinent
information.

1.11.9 Working drawings shall be provided in electronic format in accordance with the GM
WFG Graphics Standard (NAO-0067) unless otherwise specified by the
PURCHASING DIVISION.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 5 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

1.11.10 As-built drawings shall be submitted at the completion of the project. As-built
drawings shall include final shop drawings, final working drawings and location of
all hidden or buried conduits.

1.11.11 Manuals shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of the SAE
Standard for Electrical Equipment for Automotive Industrial Machinery, 2002
Edition, SAE HS-1738.

1.11.12 At the completion of the project, all of the above documentation shall be compiled,
assembled and submitted to the Purchasing Division.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 6 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

2. MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND LOADCENTER SUBSTATION


EQUIPMENT

2.1 GENERAL

2.1.1 The installation methods incorporated in this section are for medium voltage
switchgear and loadcenter substation equipment.

2.1.2 It shall be the responsibility of those installing the equipment to be knowledgeable


of the following:
1. The Purchasing Division’s equipment specifications.
2. The manufacturers’ equipment to be furnished.
3. The equipment installation and interconnection requirements and service
manuals.
4. The responsibilities of the manufacturer’s field service engineer.
5. The equipment operating procedures.

2.1.3 The equipment will be delivered to the installation site by truck. The equipment will
be shipped in sub-assembled units that unless otherwise indicated by the
PURCHASING DIVISION, will allow passage through doors, aisle ways, and
equipment room hatches.

2.2 TEMPORARY STORAGE

2.2.1 When the equipment delivery schedule requires temporary storage, the installer
shall provide weather protection, temporary heating, etc. in accordance with the
requirements of the equipment manufacturer.

2.2.2 Provisions for temporary storage of equipment shall be reviewed and approved by
the Purchasing Division.

2.3 ACCESSIBILITY AND REMOVAL

2.3.1 Medium voltage switchgear and loadcenter substation installations shall be


arranged to make the equipment completely accessible and allow the removal of
major components without rearranging the remaining equipment.

2.3.2 All equipment workspace requirements shall be as indicated below. Under no


conditions shall the working space be less than required by Article 110 of the
National Electrical Code (NEC), Section 2-308 and 2-310 of the Canadian
Electrical Code (CEC), or the Mexican Electrical Code (MEC), as applicable.

2.3.3 Access to medium voltage switchgear shall be as follows:

1. Rear: 5 feet minimum.


2. Front: 8 feet minimum or the total depth of the switchgear, whichever is
greater.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 7 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

2.3.4 Access to loadcenter Unit Substations shall be as follows:

1. Rear of medium voltage incoming line sections: 5 feet minimum.


2. Rear of transformer: 3 feet minimum.
3. Rear of low voltage secondary switchgear: 4 feet minimum.
4. Front of equipment: 6 feet 6inches minimum or the total depth of the largest
component, whichever is greater.

2.4 FIELD INSTALLATION

2.4.1 The installer shall provide all necessary labor, materials, tools, and equipment to
perform the following:

1. Receive, inspect for physical damage, unload, transport, rig, lift, set, align,
level, secure in place, install, interconnect, wire (includes wiring external to
the substation), and connect the equipment as indicated in the contract
documents, installation drawings, and the manufacturer’s documentation.
2. Receive, inspect and install the electrical equipment accessories furnished by
the manufacturer. Accessories include, but are not limited to circuit breaker
lifting devices, protective device test equipment, special tools, battery racks,
batteries, battery charger, power factor correction capacitor units, neutral
grounding resistors, incoming and tie busway, and spare parts.
3. Equipment identification shall be in accordance with Section 11, Painting,
Identification, Arc Flash and Lockout Energy Control.
4. Coordinate the placement and setting of leveling channels in accordance with
the contract documents and equipment manufacturer’s requirements.
Exercise extreme care when setting and aligning the channels flush with the
finished floor. Grout, shim and grind as required to prevent the stressing of
electrical insulators and bus structures as well as to provide proper alignment
of the rollout devices.
5. Install power factor correction capacitor units on concrete housekeeping
bases provided by the installer. Cast-in-place concrete shall be in accordance
with GM Onespec, Section 03300, Cast-In-Place Concrete.
6. Connect all equipment ground buses to the perimeter ground bus in the
equipment room in accordance with the contract documents, Section 8,
Grounding, and as indicated below.
a. 15 kV primary switchgear lineups – two ground connections required
each lineup, the incoming line section and the end or last section of the
switchgear.
b. Medium and low voltage unit substations, sparing scheme– three
ground connections required, primary and secondary side of
transformer, and the last section or end of the secondary switchgear.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 8 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

c. Medium and low voltage unit substations, double ended scheme– four
ground connections required, primary and secondary side of each
transformer
7. Seal all floor and wall openings, conduit openings, busway openings, etc. in a
manner that maintains the room’s required fire rating. Openings shall also
be sealed to prevent infiltration of dust and other foreign material into the
equipment as well as the equipment room.
8. Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, brackets, temporary blocking of
moving parts, and tools from the equipment. Clean and touchup paint the
interior and exterior of the electrical equipment in accordance with Section 11,
Painting, Identification, Arc Flash and Lockout Energy Control.
9. Perform and furnish the equipment and personnel necessary to complete the
inspections and tests required by Section 12, Inspections and Field
Acceptance Tests and the equipment manufacturers’ service engineer.
10. Assist the manufacturer’s service engineer in completing inspection, testing,
settings, and calibration procedures as outlined in the equipment purchase
documents, as specified in the appropriate engineering field service sections
of GM electrical equipment specifications 1E, 2E, 3E, 4E, 13E and Section 12,
Inspections and Field Acceptance Test.
11. The installation procedures, methods, and safe work plans shall be in
accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s requirements and safety
requirements as specified in Section 12, Inspections and Field Acceptance
Test. Those activities requiring coordination with routine operations of the
Purchasing Division shall be scheduled and approved by the Purchasing
Division.

2.5 PHASING AND IDENTIFICATION

2.5.1 All electrical equipment shall have phases checked and identified near terminals.

2.5.2 When facing the front (draw-out side) of any electrical equipment, phasing shall be
A-B-C (X-Y-Z), left to right, top to bottom, front to back as defined in Article 408 of
the National Electrical Code.

2.5.3 Phase identification shall be placed on the structure adjacent to the bus or on the
housing. Phase testing shall be in accordance with Section 12, Inspections and
Field Acceptance Tests.

2.6 TRANSFORMERS

2.6.1 Transformer installations shall be in accordance with Article 450 of the NEC,
Sections 26-240 through 26-262 of the CEC, or MEC as applicable and the
manufacturer’s requirements.

2.6.2 Proper containment requirements in accordance with the NEC, CEC, or MEC shall
be provided when installing liquid filled transformers.

2.7 INCOMING AND TIE BUSWAY

Template Revised 5-06 Page 9 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

2.7.1 General

2.7.1.1 All medium voltage busway systems shall be UL, ULC, CSA, or ANCE labeled, as
appropriate, and shall comply with all applicable CSA, ANSI, and NEMA standards
and GM specifications, including, but not limited to the following:

1. ANSI/IEEE C37.23 Standard for Metal-Enclosed bus


2. GM 2E Medium Voltage Metal Clad Switchgear and Vacuum Circuit Breakers
3. GM Onespec, Section 16375

2.7.1.2 All low voltage tie busway systems (600 Volts and below), including busway
installation, shall be in accordance with Section 2.7.1.3 and Section 3, Low
Voltage Equipment.

2.7.1.3 Low voltage tie busway systems, for connecting substations in a sparing scheme,
shall be provided with a minimum of 10 feet of plug-in busway in each substation
room, unless otherwise indicated by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

2.7.2 Medium Voltage Incoming and Tie Busway

2.7.2.1 Busway shall be installed in accordance with this standard, the contract
documentation, and the manufacturer’s requirements.

2.7.2.2 Busway installations shall be coordinated with all other trades to avoid
interferences.

2.7.2.3 Coordinate busway terminations to equipment enclosures to ensure proper


phasing, connection, and closure.

2.7.2.4 Busway shall be installed to provide adequate clearance for maintenance of the
busway system.

2.7.2.5 Busway exposed to the weather shall be of weatherproof design and installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.

2.7.2.6 Installation shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner, with busways
installed parallel to the column lines of the building, or in vertical lines as required.

2.7.2.7 The installer shall make certain that all busways are level and in alignment to
prevent abnormal stresses to the busway structure.

2.7.2.8 All busways shall be properly grounded to the “building equipment grounding
system” at the source end, according to the contract documents and Section 8,
Grounding.

2.7.2.9 The installer shall carefully examine all new or re-used sections of the busway and
its components to ensure that surfaces are thoroughly cleaned and in proper
condition for assembly.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 10 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

2.7.2.10 The installer shall use the manufacturer’s recommended cleaner for removing dirt
and foreign material from busway and fittings.

2.7.2.11 The installer shall provide support hangers and hardware as required for a
complete installation. Busway shall be supported according to contract documents
and the manufacturer’s requirements.

2.7.2.12 Design each busway fastener and support to carry 4 times the supported weight of
the busway.

2.7.2.13 Fasten supports securely to building structure according to Section 9, Fasteners


and Supports.

2.7.2.14 Modify supports after completion to eliminate strains and stresses on bus bars and
housings.

2.7.2.15 Support busway independently from equipment enclosure at connection to medium


voltage switchgear.

2.7.2.16 Support busway independently from supports for other elements such as pipe,
conduit, ceilings, and ducts.

2.7.2.17 Incoming busway shall have a fire barrier at each switchgear entry point and shall
have a fire and vapor barrier where busway penetrates the building wall.

2.7.2.18 Tie busway shall have a fire barrier at each switchgear entry point.

2.7.2.19 The installer shall be responsible for cutting openings in walls, floors and ceilings
as required for the installation of busways. After the busway installation, all such
openings shall be repaired to maintain required fire ratings. In addition, openings
shall be completely sealed to prevent the passage of dust, smoke or other airborne
contaminants.

2.7.2.20 All busway shall be labeled in accordance with Section 11, Painting,
Identification, Arc Flash and Lockout Energy Control.

2.7.2.21 A torque wrench shall be used to secure uniform tension, according to equipment
manufacturer’s published torque tightening values, on all busway joints. Each bolt
shall be marked after the bolt is torqued.

2.7.2.22 Prior to energizing the busway, the installer shall test and megger all busway in
accordance with the equipment manufacturer and Section 12, Inspections and
Field Acceptance Tests.

2.8 SUBSTATION ROOM TOOL CABINETS

2.8.1 At each switchgear and substation room, provide and install a cabinet for
substation tools, as shown in Figures 2-1 and 2-2, unless otherwise specified by
the PURCHASING DIVISION. Install the unit substation tools in the cabinet. The
tools will be furnished by the unit substation manufacturer. The high voltage

Template Revised 5-06 Page 11 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

detector, specified under separate heading in this Section, shall be installed in the
tool cabinet.

2.8.2 Each back panel shall be provided with pins to hold the substation tools (breaker
racking cranks, primary switch operating handles, manual breaker and switch
handles, lifting device spreader bars, lifting device operating cranks, etc.) in an
orderly manner. Tool outlines shall be painted on the back panel.

2.8.3 The cabinet for substation tools shall be finish painted in accordance with Section
11, Painting, Identification, Arc Flash and Lockout Energy Control.

2.9 HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTORS

2.9.1 At each switchgear and substation room, provide a portable self-contained device
for fast and positive determination of the presence of voltage in the range of 1.4 kV
to ground and 2.4 kV through 23 kV ungrounded, 25 to 60 hertz, unless otherwise
specified by the PURCHASING DIVISION. The instrument shall be designed for
indoor or outdoor use under any calibration, or connections to ground. The detector
shall be furnished with a 4’ extension section and a flow-lamp tester.

2.9.2 The detector shall include the following:


1. W. H. Salisbury, AC Voltage Tester Kit, catalog #4356 which includes;
a. Tester, catalog #4244
b. Case, catalog #4315
c. Shotgun adapter, catalog#2500
d. Universal Fiberglass Stick, catalog #4230

2.10 HOIST UNIT

2.10.1 Provide a geared electric motor-operated hoist with portable cable and pendant
push-button control station to operate from a 480-volt, 3phase, 60 Hz, power
receptacle as specified below unless otherwise specified by the PURCHASING
DIVISION.

2.10.2 The electric hoist unit shall be wire rope, low-headroom, and high lift type.

2.10.3 The operating requirements shall be as follows:

1. Lifting capacity……………….20, 000 pounds, minimum.


2. Hoist operating speed………15 feet per minute, minimum.
3. Lifting height………………….50 feet.

2.10.4 The hoist operation shall be controlled from the floor level by a pendant push
button control station suspended approximately 4’ above the floor. The control
panel on the hoist unit shall have an integral 480/120-volt dual winding control
transformer protected by fuses.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 12 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

2.10.5 The pendant control station shall consist of oil-tight push buttons rated 6 six
amperes at 120 volts AC installed in an oil-tight, oil-proof rubber enclosure with a
high visibility yellow finish and supported with a messenger cable or chain. The
control cable shall be provided with a heavy duty neoprene or synthetic rubber
jacket and attached to the hoist control panel and pendant station with oil-tight,
strain relief type cable connectors. The pendant station enclosure shall be as
manufactured by the following:
1. Daniel Woodhead Co.

2.10.6 The hoist shall be equipped with 75 feet of four-conductor No. 8 AWG 600 volt,
type SO yellow neoprene jacket portable cable, strain relief type box connector,
and 60-ampere plug cap to fit the Owner’s receptacle.

2.10.7 The hoist may be utilized to install the unit substations if maintained in good
condition and turned over to the Owner at the completion of the project at a
location determined by the Owner. Any special hardware fabricated or purchased
to handle the unit substations shall also be turned over to the Owner.

2.11 DIAGRAM BOARDS

2.11.1 At each switchgear and substation room, furnish and install two (2) diagram boards
unless otherwise specified by the PURCHASING DIVISION. Power-distribution
system diagrams furnished by the Purchasing Division shall be mounted to the
boards by the installer.

2.11.2 Each diagram board shall be three feet (3’) by four feet (4’). Diagram boards shall
be Greensteel, Inc. “B” Series, or Claridge Type 4120-B.

2.11.3 The installer shall locate and install the diagram boards as specified in the contract
documents or as required by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

2.11.4 The diagrams for each equipment room shall include a site-wide switching single
line diagram and an operational single line diagram for the switchgear located in
the room indicating the cable identifications and the normal and alternate operating
positions of switches and breakers. Reference GM NAO 0070, Common Electrical
Power Distribution Documentation Guideline.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 13 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Switchgear and Substation Room Tool Cabinet Backboard Detail


Figure 2 - 1

Template Revised 5-06 Page 14 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Switchgear and Substation Room Tool Cabinet


Figure 2 - 2

Template Revised 5-06 Page 15 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

3. LOW VOLTAGE EQUIPMENT (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)

3.1 BUSWAY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

3.1.1 General

3.1.1.1 All busway systems, including trolley busway, welder busway, and power and light
busway, shall comply with Appendix E, Equipment Specifications, E3.1.

3.1.1.2 Busway sections shall be installed in 10 foot lengths wherever possible.

3.1.1.3 Busways shall be installed in accordance with this standard, the contract
documents, and the manufacturer’s requirements.

3.1.1.4 The location of busway shall be coordinated with other utilities, equipment, and
building structures to provide working clearance in front of bus plugs and
accessibility to bus plugs from the floor and as required by the NEC, CEC, or MEC.

3.1.1.5 Busway shall be installed to provide adequate clearance for maintenance and
access of plug-in devices. Bus plugs shall be placed on the bus in serviceable
locations. Aisle locations, platforms, conveyor screen guarding, and equipment
location must be considered when placing the bus plug.

3.1.1.6 Busway installations shall be located at least 60 inches from any piping such as
gas, water and steam lines. Installation of busways below gas, water and steam
lines and in high ambient temperature areas above 120 degrees Fahrenheit shall
be avoided.

3.1.1.7 Busway terminations to equipment enclosures shall be coordinated to ensure


proper phasing, connection, and closure.

3.1.1.8 Installation shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner, with busways
installed parallel to the column lines of the building, or in vertical lines as required.

3.1.1.9 The installer shall make certain that all busways are level and in alignment to
prevent abnormal stresses to the busway joints and structure. The installer shall
install all vertical offsets plumb.

3.1.1.10 All busways shall be properly grounded to the “building equipment grounding
system” at the source end, according to the contract documents and Section 8,
Grounding.

3.1.2 Enclosed Busway

3.1.2.1 The installer shall be responsible for providing all busway parts and components
necessary for a complete installation, including tap boxes, plug-in devices, fittings,
etc.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 16 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

3.1.2.2 Busway exposed to the weather shall be of weatherproof design and installed in
accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. It is recommended that the
installer make periodic megger tests during installation in accordance with Section
12, Inspections and Field Acceptance Tests.

3.1.2.3 The installer shall protect busway, fittings and accessories from the weather before
and after installation. The busway shall not be installed before the building roof is
weather tight.

3.1.2.4 Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, busway shall be installed flatwise with
phase positions of ground, phase A, phase B and phase C, top-to-bottom
throughout the plant. Phase transposition sections shall be installed as near as
practicable to the unit substations to meet this criterion.

3.1.2.5 Horizontal busways shall be installed above the bottom chord of truss unless
otherwise specified in the contract documents. Bus plugs shall not extend below
the bottom chord of truss.

3.1.2.6 Standard rigid type busway fittings shall be used for changes in elevation and
direction. Conduit and/or flexible type connections shall not be used for this
purpose.

3.1.2.7 Expansion type fittings shall be installed at all points where busway crosses
building expansion joints. The installer shall provide and install additional busway
expansion fittings as indicated in the contract documents or per the manufacturer’s
requirements.

3.1.2.8 All busway runs passing through fire rated walls, floors and smoke curtains, shall
be provided with a double flanged, internal fire barrier constructed of fire resistant
material.

3.1.2.9 The installer shall be responsible for cutting openings in walls, floors and ceilings
as required for the installation of busways. After the busway installation, all such
openings shall be repaired and completely sealed to prevent the passage of dust,
smoke or other airborne contaminants.

3.1.2.10 Vertical busway runs between floors or exposed to plant traffic shall be protected
with guard posts, highway rail, or with similar protective means in accordance with
the contract documents as specified by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

3.1.2.11 The installer shall carefully examine all new or re-used sections of the busway and
its components to ensure that surfaces are thoroughly cleaned and in proper
condition for assembly.

3.1.2.12 The installer shall use the manufacturer’s recommended cleaner for removing dirt
and foreign material from busway and fittings.

3.1.2.13 Horizontal and vertical busway shall be supported at intervals not exceeding 10
feet, unless more frequent support is required by the manufacturer. In addition,
every fitting or section greater than two foot shall have a support.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 17 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

3.1.2.14 The installer shall provide support hangers and hardware as required for a
complete installation. Busway shall be supported according to the manufacturer’s
requirements and in accordance with Section 9, Fasteners and Supports.

3.1.2.15 The installer shall provide sway bracing to prevent both lateral motion and twisting
of the busway. Sway bracing shall be installed with a maximum spacing of 30 feet
and in accordance with Section 9, Fasteners and Supports.

3.1.2.16 Bus plugs rated 200 amperes and larger shall be supported independently of the
busway.

3.1.2.17 The installer shall support connecting conduit independently of busway plug-in
units.

3.1.2.18 Single-phase loads shall be connected so that the aggregate load on each run is
balanced. The installer shall record each tap made, noting the phase to which each
tap is connected, and turn the record over to the Purchasing Division.

3.1.2.19 All busway, plug-in units, and cable tap boxes shall be labeled in accordance with
Section 11, Painting, Identification, Arc Flash and Lockout Energy Control.

3.1.2.20 Installation of all bus plug labels and corresponding equipment panel labels shall
be completed prior to application of power to equipment to enhance safety and aid
in troubleshooting. All labels shall be approved by the Purchasing Division prior to
installation.

3.1.2.21 A torque wrench shall be used to secure uniform tension on all busway joints.
Torque requirements shall comply with the manufacturer’s requirements.

3.1.2.22 Prior to energizing the busway, the installer shall check, inspect, test and megger
all busway in accordance with the equipment manufacturer and Section 12,
Inspections and Field Acceptance Tests. It is recommended that the installer
perform periodic megger tests during installation.

3.1.3 Industrial Trolley Busway

3.1.3.1 The installer shall be responsible for supplying all parts and components necessary
for a complete installation.

3.1.3.2 Industrial trolley busway shall be installed parallel to conveyor or other process
equipment with proper alignment to maintain joint integrity throughout the
installation.

3.1.3.3 A readily accessible fused disconnect switch shall be furnished and installed for
each trolley busway installation.

3.1.3.4 The installer shall coordinate and maintain phasing throughout the installation.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 18 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

3.1.3.5 All trolley busway shall be installed such that it is not readily accessible and shall
be labeled in accordance with Section 11, Painting, Identification, Arc Flash
and Lockout Energy Control.

3.1.3.6 The installer shall thoroughly clean all contact surfaces before sections are joined
together. Use a manufacturer’s recommended or approved cleaner to avoid
damage to plating on busways.

3.1.3.7 Supports for trolley busway shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations
and shall be implemented utilizing the methods outlined in Section 9, Fasteners
and Supports.

3.1.3.8 Added supports required for additional weight or dynamic loading shall be provided
according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and PURCHASING DIVISION
approval.

3.1.3.9 The installer shall test the entire installation before energizing in accordance with
Section 12, Inspections and Field Acceptance Tests.

3.1.3.10 Any tools furnished by the manufacturer for the installation of trolley busway shall
be turned over to the Purchasing Division when the installation is complete.

3.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES (FUSED AND NON-FUSED)

3.2.1 All disconnect switches shall comply with Appendix E, Equipment Specifications,
E3.2.

3.2.2 Disconnect switches shall be mounted so that the center of the grip of the
operating handle, when in its highest position, is 5 feet 6 inches above the finished
floor. Where special circumstances require other mounting heights, this dimension
shall not be less than 36 inches or more than 78 inches above the finished floor.

Exception: The 36 inch minimum mounting height is not applicable to motor


control center and fusible panelboards installations.

3.2.3 Disconnect switches shall be located in a readily accessible location protected


against damage from plant traffic.

3.2.4 Disconnect switches shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner in


accordance with Section 9, Fasteners and Supports.

3.2.5. Disconnect switches shall be labeled in accordance with Section 11, Painting,
Identification, Arc Flash and Lockout Energy Control.

3.3 POWER RECEPTACLES (480 VOLTS)

3.3.1 Power receptacles shall be a combination 480-volt power receptacle with a fused
disconnect switch, or a non-fused disconnect switch protected by an upstream RK-
5 fuse. The disconnect switch shall be in accordance with Appendix E,
Equipment Specifications, E3.2. The type of receptacle shall be the exact type
specified by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 19 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Exception: Meltric DS series power receptacles are acceptable if specified and


approved by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

3.3.2 The receptacle shall be an aluminum angle type with spring door, interlocked with
the disconnect switch to prevent the insertion or withdrawal of the plug cap except
when the disconnect switch is open.

3.3.3 Power receptacles shall be limited to a maximum 100-ampere rating.

3.3.4 Power receptacles shall be mounted at 42 inches from the finished floor to center
of unit.

3.3.5 Power receptacles shall be mounted in accordance with Section 9, Fasteners and
Supports.

3.3.6 Power receptacles shall be labeled in accordance with Section 11, Painting,
Identification, Arc Flash and Lockout Energy Control.

3.4 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS AND CONTROL PANEL ENCLOSURES

3.4.1 General

3.4.1.1 The installer shall provide a high quality, functional and reliable equipment
installation by referencing the Purchasing Division’s specifications and the
manufacturer’s manuals to become familiar with the equipment design details and
electrical system requirements.

3.4.1.2 Motor control centers, motor controllers, control panels, and equipment / machines
shall be in accordance with the following GM standards and specifications unless
modified by the contract documents:

1. GM 12E, Motor Control Centers and Combination Motor Starters 600 Volts
and below
2. GM 12E-ASD, Low Voltage Adjustable Speed Drive Motor Controllers for
Facilities Loads
3. GM 12E-SS, Low Voltage Soft Start Motor Controllers for Facilities Loads
4. SAE Standard for Electrical Equipment for Automotive Industrial Machinery,
2002 Edition, SAE HS-1738

3.4.2 Handling

3.4.2.1 Motor control centers may be bolted to wooden skids for the purpose of shipping.
The installer shall utilize the proper lifting equipment (i.e. fork lift trucks, etc.) to
move motor control centers and control panels. Motor control centers and control
panels shall remain on the skid until unit is installed.

3.4.2.2 Lift angles shall be provided on all motor control center sections to facilitate
hoisting with a crane. The installer shall use the proper load rated safety hooks,

Template Revised 5-06 Page 20 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

shackles and proper lifting method to ensure safe movement of the motor control
centers.

3.4.3 Storage

3.4.3.1 The installer shall store the motor control centers and control panel enclosures in a
clean and secure space. The motor control centers and control panels shall be
covered with a canvas or heavy-duty plastic over to protect it from debris, dust and
other contaminants. If the storage area is cool or damp, the motor control centers
and control panel enclosures shall be completely covered and heated to prevent
condensation.

3.4.4 Location and Installation

3.4.4.1 Motor control centers and control panels shall be located on a flat and level surface.
When specified by the PURCHASING DIVISION motor control centers and control
panels shall be located on 4-inch minimum concrete pads to protect them from
water, dirt and contaminants. Control panels shall be on risers to protect them from
water, dirt and contaminants. Motor control centers and control panels shall be
anchored to the floor, platform, or concrete pad unless otherwise specified by the
PURCHASING DIVISION.

3.4.4.2 Motor control centers, combination motor starters and control panels shall have
overhead and working space clearance to facilitate installation, overhead
connections, and maintenance as indicated below. Under no conditions shall the
working space be less than required by Article 110 of the National Electrical Code
(NEC), Section 2-308 and 2-310 of the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC), or the
Mexican Electrical Code (MEC), as applicable.

1. Overhead clearance: 18 inches minimum


2. Front clearance: 42 inches minimum (480 Volts); 36 inches minimum (120
Volts)
Note: Manufacturing equipment, in accordance with NFPA 79 (USA only) may only
require front clearances 6 inches less than listed above, if specified and approved
by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

3.4.4.3 Space shall be allocated for future expansion whenever possible.

3.4.4.4 When conduit enters the bottom of the motor control centers, all conduits shall be
installed at a uniform level and stubbed above the finished floor.

3.4.4.5 Conduits entering the motor control centers shall be prearranged to reduce excess
conduit bends, and to ensure neat and workmanlike runs.

3.4.4.6 All conduits entering the motor control centers shall have a permanent metal
connection for grounding purposes or be supplied with grounding bushings and
connected to the equipment ground bus.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 21 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

3.4.4.7 Motor control centers located on a platform grating shall be provided with a bottom
enclosing plate.

3.4.4.8 The installer shall seal floor openings to prevent dust, contaminants, rodents, etc.,
from entering the Motor control centers.

3.4.4.9 Motor control centers and control panels shall be grounded in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations and Section 8, Grounding.

3.4.4.10 The installer shall completely clean the motor control centers and control panels
when ready to energize.

3.4.4.11 Motor control centers, motor control center feeders, and control panels shall be
labeled in accordance with Section 11, Painting, Identification, Arc Flash and
Lockout Energy Control.

3.4.4.12 The installer shall provide a cautionary sign when motor control centers and control
panels contain interlock circuitry or separately supplied circuits. Sign shall be in
accordance with Section 11, Painting, Identification, Arc Flash and Lockout
Energy Control. Refer to Section 6.2.2 for interlock circuitry conductor color-
coding requirements.

3.4.4.13 All motor control centers and control panel equipment shall be tested in
accordance with applicable paragraphs in Section 12, Inspections and Field
Acceptance Tests.

3.5 COMBINATION MOTOR STARTERS AND WALL MOUNTED PANEL


ENCLOSURES

3.5.1 General

3.5.1.1 The installer shall provide a high quality, functional and reliable equipment
installation by referencing the Purchasing Division’s specifications and the
manufacturer’s manuals to become familiar with the equipment design details and
electrical system requirements.

3.5.1.2 Combination Motor starters, motor controllers, control panels, and equipment /
machines shall be in accordance with the following GM standards and
specifications unless modified by the contract documents:

1. GM 12E, Motor Control Centers and Combination Motor Starters 600 Volts
and below
2. GM 12E-ASD, Low Voltage Adjustable Speed Drive Motor Controllers for
Facilities Loads
3. GM 12E-SS, Low Voltage Soft Start Motor Controllers for Facilities Loads
4. SAE Standard for Electrical Equipment for Automotive Industrial Machinery,
2002 Edition, SAE HS-1738

Template Revised 5-06 Page 22 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

3.5.2 Location and Installation

3.5.2.1 Combination motor starters mounted on columns shall be mounted in the web
where possible.

3.5.2.2 Combination motor starters shall be mounted so that the center of the grip of the
handle, when in its highest position is 5 feet-6 inches above the finished floor.

3.5.2.3 Combination motor starters and wall mounted panel enclosures shall be mounted
so as to be protected against damage from plant traffic.

3.5.2.4 Combination motor starters and wall mounted panel enclosures shall have
overhead and working space clearance to facilitate installation, overhead
connections, and maintenance as indicated in Section 3.4.4.2.

3.5.2.5 Combination motor starters and wall mounted panel enclosures shall be installed in
accordance with Section 9, Fasteners and Supports.

3.5.2.6 Wall mounted enclosures shall be mounted a minimum of 20 inches above the
floor and a minimum of 10 inches clear of any object below the enclosure.

3.5.2.7 Wall mounted enclosure mounting stands shall be constructed with a minimum of
1-5/8 x 1-5/8 inch steel strut channel unless otherwise specified by the Purchasing
Division.

3.5.2.8 Wall mounted enclosures shall not be mounted to fence panels.

3.5.2.9 Wall mounted enclosures mounted to fences shall be securely bolted to the fence
posts with a minimum of 0.25 x 1.5 inch steel straps or 1-5/8 x 1-5/8 inch steel strut
channel with the top of the enclosure at a maximum height of 60 inches.

3.5.2.10 Steel strut channel or steel strapping shall not span a fence section that is greater
than 48 inches wide.

3.5.2.11 The bottom row of pushbuttons and lights on an electrical enclosure shall be
located no lower than 40 inches from the floor.

3.5.2.12 The installer shall provide a cautionary sign when combination motor starters and
panels contain interlock circuitry or separately supplied circuits. Sign shall be in
accordance with Section 11, Painting, Identification, Arc Flash and Lockout
Energy Control. Refer to Section 6.2.2 for interlock circuitry conductor color-
coding requirements.

3.5.2.13 The installer shall provide a label identifying the equipment being serviced by the
combination motor starter and wall-mounted panel. The label shall be in
accordance with Section 11, Painting, Identification, Arc Flash and Lockout
Energy Control.

3.6 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS (FIXED CAPACITORS)

Template Revised 5-06 Page 23 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

3.6.1 Power factor correction capacitors shall comply with GM NA Common Controls
Hardware Design Standards CCH-1 (Design specification) and Appendix E,
Equipment Specifications, E3.4, unless otherwise specified by the
PURCHASING DIVISION.

3.6.2 Power factor correction capacitors shall be installed in accordance with this
standard, the contract documents, and the manufacturer’s requirements.

3.6.3 Power factor correction capacitors shall be installed for all AC single-speed, non-
reversing motors rated 7.5 horsepower and greater.

3.6.4 Power factor correction capacitors shall not be designed into any multi-speed
motor circuit or any motor controlled by an adjustable speed drive.

3.6.5 Power factor correction capacitors shall be located in motor control centers, except
where capacitors are indicated to be individually mounted. Individually mounted
shunt capacitors shall be located adjacent to motor starters.

3.6.6 Power factor correction capacitors shall be connected between the starter
contactor and the overload device.

3.6.7 Maintain minimum workspace according to NEC, CEC, or MEC and manufacturer's
written instructions.

3.6.8 Power factor correction capacitors shall be labeled shall in accordance with
Section 11, Painting, Identification, Arc Flash and Lockout Energy Control.

3.7 PANELBOARDS

3.7.1 All fusible, circuit breaker, and intelligent circuit breaker panelboards shall comply
with Appendix E, Equipment Specifications, E3.5 and E3.6.

3.7.2 Install panelboards such that working clearances are provided in accordance with
NEC, CSA, or MEC requirements.

3.7.3 Panelboards shall be installed in accordance with Section 9, Fasteners and


Supports.

3.7.4 Mount panelboards at uniform heights throughout the building as indicated, and
such that the distance from the floor to the center of the top switch or circuit
breaker does not exceed 78 inches.

3.7.5 Mount panelboards securely to walls or columns and provide all necessary strut
channel, spacers, brackets, structural pieces, inserts, anchors and bolts for this
purpose.

3.7.6 Anchor fusible panelboards securely to floors and to supporting steel where such
supports are indicated or required.

3.7.7 The installer shall ensure that the panel is plumb.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 24 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

3.7.8 For flush mounted panelboards, provide a minimum of four 1-1/2 inch empty
conduits up into the truss space or ceiling space for future wiring from panelboard
to loads. In addition, where mounted above a raised floor or supported slab, also
provide a minimum of four 1-1/2 inch empty conduits down into the raised floor
space or below the supported slab for future wiring from panelboard to loads.

3.7.9 In plant areas, provide one duplex receptacle below each column-mounted
panelboard connected to a branch circuit breaker.

3.7.10 Panelboards shall be grounded in accordance with Section 8, Grounding.

3.7.11 Provide ground fault protection where required by code.

3.7.12 All line and load connections shall be as specified in Section 6, Low Voltage
Wiring.

3.7.13 The installer shall balance the loads and provide a typewritten circuit directory card
in the panelboard directory card holder.

3.7.14 Directories shall designate the lighting fixtures, outlets, and loads controlled by
each branch circuit in the panel and the location of the loads. The required
information shall be neatly typewritten on the directories in each panel cabinet.

3.7.15 Provide at least 10 percent spare switches or circuit breakers in each panelboard.
Provide more spares where indicated.

3.7.16 Install handle-locking devices on all breakers for Fire Alarm and Security Systems,
night lighting, emergency lighting, drinking fountains, and similar circuits which
should remain on.

3.7.17 Install filler plates in all unused spaces.

3.7.18 Clean and touch up paint the interior and exterior of the electrical equipment in
accordance with Section 11, Painting, Identification, Arc Flash and Lockout
Energy Control.

3.7.19 Provide panelboard identification and warning signs in accordance with Section 11,
Painting, Nameplate Identification, and Warning Signs.

3.8 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS AND MINI-LOAD CENTERS

3.8.1 Transformers and mini-load centers shall comply with Appendix E, Equipment
Specifications, E3.7.

3.8.2 The transformers and mini-load centers shall be handled, transported and stored, if
necessary, by the installer.

3.8.3 Transformers and mini-load centers shall be installed in a space, which is


adequately ventilated and provides sufficient working clearances according to NEC,
CEC, or MEC requirements.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 25 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

3.8.4 The installer shall furnish and install the necessary structural steel channels, angle
iron, steel rods, hardware, clamps, and bracing, etc. to secure transformers and
mini-load centers to building steel as designated in the contract documents and in
accordance with Section 9, Fasteners and Supports.

3.8.5 Transformers and mini-load centers shall be grounded in accordance with Section
8, Grounding.

3.8.6 Provide transformer and mini-load center identification and warning signs in
accordance with Section 11, Painting, Identification, Arc Flash and Lockout
Energy Control.

3.8.7 The installer shall balance the loads and provide a typewritten circuit directory card
in the mini-load center directory card holder.

3.8.8 Directories shall designate the lighting fixtures, outlets, and loads controlled by
each branch circuit in the panel.

3.8.9 Adjust tap settings of transformers to provide the proper secondary voltage when
panelboards and mini-load centers are normally loaded.

3.9 WIRING DEVICES

3.9.1 All receptacles, switches, and cover plates shall comply with Appendix E,
Equipment Specifications, E3.9.

3.9.2 Install receptacles and switches in outlet boxes as specified in Section 4,


Raceway and Cable Tray Systems.

3.9.3 Receptacle connections shall be made in a manner such that common neutral
circuits will not be opened by the removal of the receptacle.

3.9.4 Cover plates shall be installed on flush mounted outlets with all four edges in
continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without the use of plaster mats or
similar devices. Do not use plaster or similar fillings. Plates shall be installed
vertically, unless otherwise noted, with an alignment of 1/16 inch.

3.9.5 The installer shall identify receptacles and switches in accordance with Section 11,
Painting, Identification, Arc Flash and Lockout Energy Control.

3.9.6 The installer shall test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity.

3.9.7 The installer shall perform operational test on wiring devices to prove that the
circuits perform all functions for which they are designed.

3.9.8 The installer shall test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulation
according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

3.10 LUMINAIRES

Template Revised 5-06 Page 26 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

3.10.1 General

3.10.1.1 All luminaires shall comply with Appendix E, Equipment Specifications, E3.8.

3.10.1.2 Luminaire supports shall be provided and installed as required to meet the field
conditions or as indicated on the contract documents. This work shall include the
provision and installation of supporting steel, clamps, rods, channels, raceways,
conduit stems, swivel hangers, etc., as required for a complete installation.

3.10.1.3 Whenever possible, lighting contactors, motorized breaker type lighting panels, or
lighting control panels utilizing control relays shall be utilized for group switching of
luminaires. When individual panel switching is necessary, SWD (switching duty)
type circuit breakers shall be used.

3.10.1.4 The installer shall inspect all luminaires for damage and missing parts prior to
installation.

3.10.1.5 Luminaires shall be installed completed including lenses (where applicable),


reflectors, safety devices and lamps, in accordance with the manufacturer’s
requirements and the contract documents.

3.10.1.6 The installer shall be responsible for aiming, leveling and adjusting the luminaires.
Adjustable luminaires and luminaires with elongated or asymmetrical lighting
distribution patterns shall be aimed or adjusted by the installer in accordance with
the contract documents or as specified by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

3.10.1.7 Luminaires shall be supported in accordance with Section 9, Fasteners and


Supports.

3.10.2 Fluorescent Luminaires

3.10.2.1 Luminaires installed in an open ceiling area shall be supported utilizing channel,
chains or rods, as specified in the contract documents by the PURCHASING
DIVISION.

3.10.2.2 Luminaires installed in suspended ceilings shall be mechanically attached or


clipped to the framing members of the suspended ceiling.

3.10.2.3 Luminaires installed in open areas shall utilize a plug and receptacle for the power
feed to each fixture, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.

3.10.2.4 Whenever possible, lighting contactors shall be utilized for group switching of
fluorescent luminaires. When individual panel switching is necessary, SWD
(switching duty) type circuit breakers shall be used.

3.10.2.5 Fluorescent luminaires fed from emergency circuits shall have a 2 inch diameter
orange dot clearly visible from the floor. Downlights fed from emergency circuits
shall be identified per Purchasing Division’s requirements.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 27 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

3.10.2.6 Fluorescent luminaires which are supplied from normal branch circuits and from an
emergency power system shall be provided with permanent caution labels that will
identify the luminaire as being connected to more than one source. The cautionary
label shall be positioned where it will be readily notices before gaining access to
the ballast compartment. Ballasts shall also be tagged and labeled.

3.10.3 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Luminaires

3.10.3.1 Adjacent high intensity discharge (HID) luminaires shall be connected to different
phases to ensure balanced circuit loading, to reduce voltage drop, and to minimize
stroboscopic effects.

3.10.3.2 Indoor recessed HID luminaires with integral ballasts shall have thermal protection
integral with the ballast.

3.10.3.3 Safety chains shall be provided on each industrial HID luminaire to prevent it from
falling. A removable chain shall also secure the reflector to the ballast enclosure
where these components can be disassembled. Glass or metal reflector closures
shall be secured to the reflector. Chain slack shall be minimized.

3.10.3.4 Luminaires, which are mounted by hooks, shall be grounded by a green


equipment-grounding conductor, No. 14 AWG minimum. All wires from the conduit
junction box to luminaire shall be rated for 105 degrees Celsius in accordance with
NEC Article 410, CEC Section 30, or MEC, as applicable and Section 6, Low
Voltage Wiring.

3.10.3.5 HID luminaires fed from emergency circuits shall have orange painted ballast.

3.10.4 Incandescent Luminaires

3.10.4.1 Incandescent luminaires shall not be used without written approval from the
Purchasing Division.

3.10.4.2 Recessed incandescent luminaires installed in walls, cavities or ceilings shall be


provided with thermal protection and shall be identified as thermally protected.

3.10.5 Exterior Luminaires

3.10.5.1 Where luminaires are to be mounted on poles, both the luminaire and pole
manufacturer shall coordinate to ensure that the pole and luminaire are compatible.

3.10.5.2 Luminaires installed outdoors shall be suitable for the environment and be
furnished complete with gaskets, weatherproof enclosures, etc.

3.10.5.3 Exterior lighting, including building, security and street lighting, shall be supported
complete with the proper hardware necessary for the environment, weather and
maintenance conditions that exist.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 28 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

3.10.6 Exit Lights

3.10.6.1 Mounting heights for finished areas:

Ceiling heights 10’-0” above finished Exit light shall be surface mounted from the
floor or less ceiling
Ceiling heights greater than 10’-0” Exit light shall be mounted from the walls or
above finished floor columns at 8’-0” above finished floor

3.10.6.2 Mounting heights for factory areas:

Near walls or columns Exit lights shall be mounted on walls or


columns within 6’-0” (lateral) from egress
aisle at 15’-0’ above finished floor.
Not in vicinity of walls or columns Exit lights shall be surface or pendant
mounted from bottom cord of truss, bar joists
or process equipment supports at 15’-0’
above finished floor at the outside edge of
pedestrian aisle ways. Maximum length of
pendant on pendant mounted luminaires shall
not exceed 10’-0”.

3.10.7 Lamps

3.10.7.1 Lamps shall be new, of the proper rating and type for each luminaire and use,
provided and installed as a part of the work included, with the luminaires being fully
lamped and in good working order on completion of this project.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 29 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4. RACEWAY AND CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS

4.1 GENERAL

4.1.1 Raceway and cable tray systems shall comply with all applicable articles and
sections of the National Electrical Code (NEC), Canadian Electrical Code (CEC),
Mexican Electrical Code (MEC) and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, and ANCE.

4.1.2 Raceway and cable tray system installations shall comply with applicable
provisions of the NEC, CEC, or MEC as a minimum, unless more stringent
specifications are indicated in this standard.

4.1.3 Raceway and cable tray system grounding shall comply with NEC Article 250, CEC
Section 10 or MEC, Section 8, Grounding, and Manufacturer’s recommendations.

4.1.4 Raceway and cable tray are not considered an acceptable equipment grounding
conductor. A separate stranded copper equipment grounding conductor sized in
accordance with NEC Article 250, CEC, or MEC as applicable, shall be provided.

4.1.5 The use of conduit bodies shall be limited to those installations where factory
manufactured elbows cannot be used. The PURCHASING DIVISION shall approve
each conduit body installation (e.g., LB, LLB, etc.).

4.1.6 Where standard factory conduit elbows for conduits larger than 2 inch, cannot be
utilized and it is necessary that elbows, bends or offsets be made by the contractor,
the minimum radius of the curve of any conduit field bend to the centerline of the
conduit shall not be less than that specified in the NEC Table 2, Chapter 9, CEC
Section 12-922, MEC or as required by local codes.

4.1.7 The minimum acceptable conduit sizes shall be 1/2 inch.

4.1.8 Raceways, cable trays, conduit bodies and equipment shall be UL listed for the
environment in which they are installed.

4.1.9 Raceway and cable tray materials and installation for conveyors and process
electrical equipment, shall also comply with requirements of GM CCB-1.

4.1.10 Raceway and cable tray shall be supported in accordance with applicable
provisions of the NEC, CEC, or MEC and Section 9, Fasteners and Supports.

4.1.11 Expansion fittings shall be provided for all raceway and cable tray systems to
compensate for thermal expansion and contraction of the raceway, cable tray, and
building.

4.1.12 The installer shall be responsible for cutting openings in walls, floors, draft curtains,
and ceilings as required for the installation of raceways and cable trays. All
openings resulting from raceway and cable tray installations shall be repaired and
completely sealed to prevent the passage of dust, smoke, and other foreign
materials and in a manner that maintains the area’s required fire rating.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 30 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.2 CONDUIT SYSTEMS

4.2.1 Exposed Conduit

4.2.1.1 Conduit shall be run exposed on ceilings, trusses, walls, columns, etc. Conduit
shall be installed level and plumb in neat symmetrical lines parallel to building
column lines or walls and closely following the building outline.

4.2.1.2 All horizontal overhead conduits shall be installed as high as possible above the
bottom chord of truss, unless otherwise approved by the PURCHASING DIVISION.
Conduits shall not be installed above the top cord of truss.

Note: The preferred location for conduit is at the bottom of roof purlins.

4.2.1.3 Vertical and horizontal runs of conduit shall be grouped on common supports.

4.2.1.4 Install expansion fittings in conduit runs of lengths greater than 200 feet, at each
crossing of building expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated.

4.2.1.5 Route conduit at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of high temperature
surfaces, such as steam or hot water pipes and do not run conduit directly under
cold water lines.

4.2.1.6 Conduit shall not be run directly under building trusses in a manner that would
prevent structural steel from being added at a later date.

4.2.1.7 Conduit shall not be run horizontally along building walls below the bottom chord of
truss for longer than 50 feet.

4.2.1.8 Conduit shall not be run on screen guard unless approved by Purchasing Division.
When approved the conduit shall be run above the bottom of the support steel, in a
protected manner.

4.2.1.9 Conduit shall not be mounted on platforms, flooring, along or across walkways,
catwalks, accesses to platforms or areas used for pedestrian or vehicular traffic
where it may create a trip hazard, obstacle or inhibit cleaning.

4.2.1.10 Different source conductors (e.g., two bus plugs) shall not share the same conduit
to feed loads.

4.2.1.11 Source and load conductors shall not share the same conduit after the lockout
point for the system.

4.2.1.12 Install conduit sleeves for all exposed conduits and cables passing through walls,
ceilings or floors, and fill the void between sleeve and conduit with rubber caulking
flush with the end of the sleeve to seal the opening; where fire rating is required,
use fire barrier caulking.

4.2.1.13 Conduit shall be supported in accordance with applicable provisions of the NEC,
CEC, or MEC and Section 9, Fasteners and Supports.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 31 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.2.1.14 Support single conduits with single hole malleable iron galvanized pipe straps or
clevis type hangers. Do not use perforated strap or wire for conduit or hanger
support. Beam clamps of malleable iron or wrought steel with hook rods to grip the
beam flange shall be provided for conduit or hanger support. Do not use C-clamp
type fittings. Where individual conduits are suspended from concrete, masonry,
wood, etc. the conduit hanger shall be secured to a structure in accordance with
applicable provisions of the NEC, CEC, or MEC and Section 9, Fasteners and
Supports.

4.2.2 Concealed Work

4.2.2.1 In finished offices and other areas as specified, raceways shall be run in furred
spaces or concealed in the building construction.

4.2.2.2 The installer shall be responsible for providing all chases, openings, etc., unless
otherwise specified in the contract documents.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 32 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.2.3 Conduit Applications

4.2.3.1 Provide the types of conduit to be installed in the various locations in accordance
with the following table, unless otherwise specified in this section, in contract
documents, or by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

Table 4-1

Conduit Applications

Indoor exposed locations in plants Rigid steel


below 14 feet from finished floor, and
all other areas not listed below: Exception 1: Electrical metallic tubing for
non-manufacturing equipment where
continuously protected by the building
structure (e.g., columns, side wall girts, block
walls, and other permanent building
structures)
Exception 2: Electrical metallic tubing for
120 volt receptacle and lighting circuits
Indoor exposed locations in plants Electrical metallic tubing
above 14 feet from finished floor
Indoor exposed locations in offices, Electrical metallic tubing
including areas above suspended
ceilings
Outdoor exposed locations: Rigid steel
Exception: PVC coated rigid steel conduit in
constantly wet areas (cooling towers).
Concealed in masonry walls: Electrical metallic tubing.
Concealed in concrete slabs or Schedule 40 PVC with rigid steel stub-ups.
under slabs on grade:
Direct buried in earth: Schedule 40 PVC with Schedule 80 PVC
under and near roadways and railroads. Use
PVC coated rigid steel conduit at bends
greater than 15 degrees.
At motors, transformers, and Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. (Maximum
vibrating equipment length 3 feet).
Recessed lighting fixtures: Flexible steel conduit. (Maximum length 6
feet.)
Conduit sleeves: Schedule 80 PVC.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 33 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.2.4 Rigid Steel Conduit: Type RMC

4.2.4.1 Rigid Steel Conduit (RSC) shall comply with all applicable articles or sections of
the national electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, and ANCE, which
include NEC Article 344, CEC Section 12-1000, ANSI C80.1, and UL 6.

4.2.4.2 Rigid Steel Conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized and shall have the inside and
outside surfaces thoroughly protected against corrosion by an even coating of zinc.
Electro-Galvanized shall not be acceptable

4.2.4.3 Rigid Steel Conduit shall not be used where subject to corrosive environments.

4.2.4.4 Each threaded end used in a damp atmosphere or outdoor area shall be fully
coated with a conductive, copper bearing, protective, anti-seizing compound.

4.2.4.5 Conduit fittings shall be in accordance with Section 4.2.13, Conduit Bodies and
Fittings.

4.2.5 Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Type RMC

4.2.5.1 Rigid aluminum conduit (RAC) shall comply with all applicable articles or sections
of the national electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, and ANCE, which
include NEC Article 344, ANSI C80.5, and UL 6A.

4.2.5.2 Sizes below 1-¼ inches shall require specific approval of the Purchasing Division.

4.2.5.3 Rigid aluminum conduit shall not be used under the following conditions:

1. In wet or damp locations


2. Where subject to corrosive environments
3. Underground or buried in concrete
4. In Direct Contact with Earth

4.2.5.4 Install expansion fittings in exposed straight conduit runs of lengths greater than 80
feet, at each crossing of building expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated.

4.2.5.5 RAC may be cut with a mechanical cutter provided a suitable mechanical reamer is
also used to remove burrs and sharp edges formed by the cutting tool.

4.2.5.6 Conduit fittings shall be in accordance with Section 4.2.13, Conduit Bodies and
Fittings.

4.2.6 Plastic Jacketed Rigid Steel Conduit: Type RMC

4.2.6.1 Plastic jacketed rigid steel conduit (PJRSC) shall comply with all applicable articles
or sections of the national electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, and
ANCE, which include NEC Article 344, ANSI C80.1, and UL 6.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 34 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.2.6.2 Plastic jacketed (PVC coated) rigid steel conduit shall be rigid hot dip galvanized
type with hot dip threads and a self extinguishing 40 mils thick polyvinyl chloride
coating permanently fused to the conduit. Couplings and fittings bodies shall have
a plastic jacket, which extends out a minimum of one conduit diameter to provide a
liquid tight seal with the conduit.

4.2.6.3 The inside of the conduit shall have an epoxy or phenolic coating to prevent
corrosion.

4.2.6.4 Elbows, couplings, etc., shall have the same extinguishing coating.

4.2.6.5 Each threaded end used in a corrosive, damp atmosphere or outdoor area shall be
fully coated with a conductive, copper bearing, protective, anti-seizing compound.

4.2.6.6 The installation shall be made with cloth-webbed or leather straps. Channel locks
and/or pipe wrenches shall not be used.

4.2.6.7 For short radius bends a Plastic-bond hickey shall be used to prevent damage to
the plastic coating.

4.2.6.8 Touch-up compound shall be used to fuse the sleeves to the conduit coating and
protect any exposed metal caused by on-site alterations or carelessness.

4.2.7 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: Type RNC

4.2.7.1 Rigid nonmetallic PVC conduit (RNC) shall comply with all applicable articles or
sections of the national electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, and
ANCE, which include NEC Article 352, CEC Section 12-1100, NEMA TC-2 and TC-
8 (Direct Burial Conduit) or TC-6 (Concrete Encased), and UL 651.

4.2.7.2 RNC conduit for direct encasement in concrete or buried directly in the earth shall
be high impact heavy wall schedule 40 polyvinyl chloride.

4.2.7.3 RNC conduit shall not be used under the following conditions:

1. Under heavy load bearing surfaces, railroads, highway, etc. unless schedule
80 is approved in writing by Purchasing Division
2. Where subject to physical damage
3. Where subject to extreme cold
4. Where subject to ambient temperatures in excess of 50°C (122°F) unless
listed otherwise

4.2.7.4 RNC conduit lengths shall be joined by a solvent cement weld method.

4.2.7.5 The solvent cement shall be applied liberally to the outside of conduit end and the
inside of the fitting. The conduit and fitting shall be pushed together until pipe butts
against fitting shoulder. Conduit shall be twisted ¼ turn to assure smooth spread of
cement. Excess cement shall be wiped off.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 35 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.2.7.6 The solvent cement shall be recommended by the plastic conduit manufacturer
and shall meet the requirements of ASTM D-2564. Solvent cement shall be
provided in container, which indicates the date of manufacture and shall not be
more than 12 months old.

4.2.7.7 Petroleum and other non-compatible based lubricants shall not be used.

4.2.7.8 RNC conduit, adapters, couplings, fittings, elbows, and expansion couplings,
reducers and end bells, etc., shall be produced by the same manufacturer.

4.2.7.9 Factory preformed elbows and offsets shall be used on installations; however, for
special applications they may be formed in the field from straight conduit lengths in
accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.

4.2.8 Intermediate Metal Conduit: Type IMC

4.2.8.1 Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) shall comply with all applicable articles or
sections of the national electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, and
ANCE, which include NEC Article 342, ANSI C80.6, and UL 1242.

4.2.8.2 Intermediate metal conduit shall meet the same requirements as rigid steel conduit
and fittings. Refer to Section 4.2.5, Rigid Steel Conduit.

4.2.8.3 Intermediate metal conduit shall not be used under the following conditions:

1. In hazardous areas.
2. Underground or buried in concrete.
3. For circuits exceeding 600V.

4.2.9 Electrical Metallic Tubing: Type EMT

4.2.9.1 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall comply with all applicable articles or sections
of the national electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, and ANCE, which
include NEC Article 358, CEC Section 12-1400, ANSI C80.3, and UL 797.

4.2.9.2 EMT shall be of mild steel tube, having a circular cross-section and standard wall
thickness.

4.2.9.3 The inside and outside surface of EMT shall be protected against corrosion with an
even and thorough coating of zinc.

4.2.9.4 The zinc coating of the finished tubing shall have an even and smooth appearance
and be of uniform quality for the full length of the tube.

4.2.9.5 All connectors and couplings for EMT shall be of the raintight steel compression
type, with a thermosetting insulated throat. For sizes larger than 2 inch set screw
type connectors shall be allowed.

4.2.9.6 Electrical metallic tubing shall not be used under the following conditions:

Template Revised 5-06 Page 36 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

1. Where subject to physical damage


2. Where subject to vibration
3. In wet or damp locations
4. Where subject to corrosive environments
5. Underground or buried in concrete
6. In hazardous (classified) locations
7. For circuits exceeding 600 volts.
8. For the support of luminaries (fixtures) or other equipment except conduit
bodies no larger then the largest trade size of the tubing.

4.2.9.7 Sizes acceptable are ½ inch minimum through 4 inches maximum.

4.2.9.8 EMT systems shall be supported in accordance with the national electrical code
and in a manner to prevent EMT from separating at compression or set screw type
couplings and connectors if the EMT was struck by a moving object.

4.2.9.9 All cut ends of EMT shall be reamed or otherwise finished to remove rough edges.

4.2.10 Flexible Metal Conduit: Type FMC

4.2.10.1 Flexible metal conduit (FMC) shall comply with all applicable articles or sections of
the national electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, and ANCE, which
include NEC Article 348, CEC Section 12-1000 and ANSI/UL 514B.

4.2.10.2 Flexible metal conduit shall consist of a single strip of galvanized steel, helically
wound, formed, and interlocked in such a manner to provide a circular cross-
section of high mechanical strength and great flexibility.

4.2.10.3 Flexible metal conduit is permitted only for the following installations:

1. Connection of lighting fixtures above suspended ceilings.


2. To facilitate wiring and afford protection wires in metal partitions.

4.2.10.4 The minimum size acceptable shall be ½ inch and the maximum length shall be 6
feet.

4.2.10.5 Connectors for use with flexible metal conduit shall be of the clamp type with a bolt
to ensure good electrical continuity.

4.2.11 Liquidtight Flexible Conduit: Types LFMC and LFNC

4.2.11.1 General

4.2.11.1.1 The length of liquidtight flexible conduit installations shall not exceed 36 inches.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 37 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Exception: With prior approval from the Purchasing Division, sizes greater than 1
inch may be increased to 60 inches maximum.

4.2.11.1.2 A separate ground wire shall be installed as a grounding connection with all sizes
of both metallic and non-metallic liquidtight flexible conduit.

4.2.11.2 Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Type LFMC

4.2.11.2.1 Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC) shall comply with all applicable articles or
sections of the national electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, and
ANCE, which include NEC Article 350, CEC Section 12-1300 and ANSI/UL 360.

4.2.11.2.2 Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be used for installations as follows:

1. Connections between all motors and rigid conduits connected there to.
2. Connections between rigid conduits and devices subject to vibration (e.g.
distribution transformers).
3. Connections between rigid conduits and devices subject to frequent removal
for maintenance purposes.
4. Where conditions of installation, operation, or maintenance require flexibility
and protection from liquids, vapors, or solids

4.2.11.2.3 Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall not be used for direct burial and in an
environmental air plenum.

4.2.11.2.4 Hazardous locations requiring explosion proof construction shall have flexible
conduit connections in accordance with Article 500 of the National Electrical Code,
Section 18 of the Canadian Electrical Code or MEC.

4.2.11.2.5 Connectors for liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be the malleable iron type with
an insulated throat.

4.2.11.3 Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit: Type LFNC

4.2.11.3.1 Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit (LFNC) shall comply with all applicable
articles or sections of the national electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA,
and ANCE, which include NEC Article 356, CEC Section 12-1300 and ANSI/UL
1660.
4.2.11.3.2 Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit shall not be used where voltages exceed
600 volts.
4.2.11.3.3 Connectors for liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit shall be malleable iron, with
an insulated throat.

4.2.12 Conduit Bodies and Fittings

4.2.12.1 Conduit bodies and fittings shall comply with all applicable articles or sections of
the national electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, and ANCE, which
include NEC Article 314, CEC 12-3000, ANSI/NEMA FB 1, and UL 514B.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 38 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.2.12.2 Conduit bodies and fittings for rigid steel or intermediate metal conduit shall be of
the cast malleable iron threaded type or cast aluminum threaded type and shall be
provided with the proper metal covers and gaskets.

4.2.12.3 Conduit bodies and fittings shall be hot dipped galvanized or zinc plated.

4.2.12.4 Threadless or split type couplings and connectors shall not be used. Where conduit
cannot be threaded into a standard coupling because of space restrictions, a union
type coupling (“Erickson”) shall be used.

4.2.12.5 Aluminum conduit fittings may only be used with aluminum conduit.

4.2.12.6 Conduits terminating at NEMA 12 and NEMA 4 enclosures without cast hubs (e.g.,
control enclosures, motor control centers, combination starters, sheet metal
enclosures in wet locations, etc.), shall be made with a positive grounding, liquid
tight sealing hub, with protective insulating throat and an “O” ring seal (e.g., Myers
hub).

4.2.12.7 Conduit terminating at threadless openings of NEMA 1 enclosures shall be made


with a double locknut and bushing.

4.2.12.8 The thread length at each conduit termination shall be sufficient to fully seat a
bushing at the conduit end.

4.2.12.9 Locknuts shall be stamped malleable iron, self-cleaning, with cut or rolled threads
and thoroughly zinc plated. They shall have notches for non-slip with positive
gripping teeth.

4.2.12.10 Bushings shall be galvanized malleable iron with thermosetting insulting inserts.

4.2.12.11 Grounding type bushings with an insulated insert shall be installed on all conduits,
where conduits are not terminated in grounded metal enclosures or where conduits
terminate at concentric or eccentric knockouts.

4.2.12.12 Expansion fittings shall be of the telescoping sleeve type, with copper ground ring,
insulated bushings, packing rings and pressure rings.

4.2.12.13 Install expansion fittings in straight runs of aluminum conduit at intervals not
greater than 80 feet when installed outdoors.

4.2.12.14 Install expansion fittings in exterior exposed conduit runs of lengths greater than
200 feet, at each crossing of building expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated.

4.2.13 Outlet, Switch, and Device Boxes

4.2.13.1 Outlet, switch, and device boxes shall comply with all applicable articles or sections
of the national electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, and ANCE, which
include NEC Article 314, CEC 12-3000, ANSI/NEMA FB 1, and UL 514A.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 39 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.2.13.2 Provide boxes in the wiring or raceway systems for pulling wires, making
connections and mounting devices and fixtures.

4.2.13.3 Boxes with concentric knockouts are not acceptable.

4.2.13.4 Boxes shall be cast aluminum or malleable iron with conduit entrance hubs
reinforced to a minimum thickness of ¼ inch, in exposed, damp or wet locations
unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.

Exception: Stamped welded steel boxes with the necessary device cover for 120
volt receptacle and lighting devices

4.2.13.5 Boxes concealed in concrete, brick, hollow-tile, dry wall, etc. in dry locations, shall
be of the one-piece galvanized pressed steel type, 4 inch square, 2 1/8 inches
deep, minimum, designed for the above application, with the necessary device
covers or plaster rings. Ceiling boxes in concrete slabs shall be boxes not less than
3 inches deep.

4.2.13.6 Boxes in damp or wet locations and in factory areas shall be provided with cover
gaskets.

4.2.13.7 Boxes installed in locations subject to weather conditions shall be stainless steel of
NEMA 4 construction or NEMA 4X with Purchasing Division approval.

4.2.13.8 Boxes in areas where enclosed and gasket construction is specified, shall be of
either cast aluminum or cast malleable iron type, with zinc plated of hot dipped
galvanized finish.

4.2.13.9 Boxes for use in hazardous areas shall be approved for use in such areas.

4.2.13.10 Install extension rings, adapters, raised covers and plaster rings on flush mounted
boxes as required. Provide flush mounted boxes in masonry block or tile walls with
tile covers.

4.2.13.11 Industrial fixtures or wiring devices suspended from ceiling outlet boxes, shall have
a minimum ½ inch rigid conduit stem, galvanized self-aligning cover, ball joint, 14
gauge steel locking ring, and a grounding screw.

4.2.13.12 Install separate concealed boxes for semi flush or recessed fixtures when required
by the fixture terminal operating temperature. Make boxes readily accessible on
removal of the fixture.

4.2.13.13 Locate boxes in offices and other finished areas with due regard for the finish and
interior architectural treatment so that outlets are centered with respect to panels,
joints or moldings, and so that plaster rings, frames and tile covers are properly
located with respect to the finished surface.

4.2.13.14 Locate boxes for wall switches controlling lighting on the latch side of door where
possible.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 40 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.2.14 Junction and Pull Boxes

4.2.14.1 Junction and pull boxes shall comply with all applicable articles or sections of the
national electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, and ANCE, which include
NEC Article 314, CEC 12-3000 and UL 50.

4.2.14.2 Junction and pull boxes shall be installed in the conduit system to facilitate the
installation of cables and wires as shown in the contract documents.

4.2.14.3 Junction and pull boxes shall be installed on all straight conduit runs exceeding
200 feet between outlets and on centers not exceeding 200 feet in straight runs.
Where bends are included between pull points, reduce the 200 foot separation
between pull points by 50 feet for each 90 degree bend and 25 feet for each 45
degree bend. Figure deductions for all other angle bends on a similar basis.

4.2.14.4 Junction and pull boxes larger than 4 11/16 inches in any dimension, installed
below the bottom chord or truss shall be NEMA 12. All other junction and pull
boxes larger than 4 11/16 in any dimension shall be NEMA 1 without knockouts.

4.2.14.5 Junction and pull boxes in wet or exposed outdoor locations shall be NEMA 4
construction.

4.2.14.6 Junction and pull boxes for use with rigid steel conduit in concrete shall be cast
iron with reinforced cover and sealing gasket flush mounted in light traffic areas.

4.2.14.7 Junction boxes or pull boxes installed in hazardous areas shall be UL approved
and labeled for the application.

4.2.14.8 Junction and pull boxes, 36 inches by 36 inches by 12 inches or larger shall require
the approval of the PURCHASING DIVISION prior to installation.

4.2.14.9 All conduit holes shall be cut with a knockout punch to closely fit the conduit size.

4.3 BOX SUPPORTS

4.3.1 All boxes mounted on concrete, hollow tile, building steel, or brick shall be
supported in accordance with Section 9, Fasteners and Supports.

4.3.2 Support boxes independent of conduit and suspended ceilings and secure rigidly in
place.

4.3.3 Boxes supported by conduit only shall be in compliance with NEC Article 300, CEC
Section 12-3014 or MEC as applicable.

4.3.4 Support boxes used for fixture support such that they are capable of carrying 100
pounds.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 41 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.4 SURFACE METAL RACEWAY

4.4.1 Surface metal raceway shall comply with all applicable articles or sections of the
national electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, and ANCE, which include
NEC Article 386, CEC Section 12-1600 and ANSI/UL 5.

4.4.2 Surface Raceway shall be treated with an approved process of rust proofing and
finished in manufacturer’s standard colors.

4.4.2.1 The use of surface raceway system as a wireway and support of lighting fixture
installation shall include all supports, closure strip, end caps, couplings, hangers,
fittings and accessories as required for a complete system.

4.4.3 Surface raceways shall be installed in uninterrupted runs for their entire length,
except where otherwise indicated on the contract documents.

4.4.3.1 Expansion type fittings shall be installed at all points where the raceway crosses
the building expansion joints.

4.4.3.2 Supports for the raceway shall be installed on the building purlin spacing except as
otherwise indicated in the contract documents and in no case shall exceed 8 feet.

4.4.3.3 The minimum gauge thickness and dimensions of surface raceway shall be as
listed below:

1. Minimum Gauge - #12 Gauge


2. Minimum Overall Cross Section Dimensions – 1 5/8 inches x 1 5/8 inches.

4.4.3.4 Surface raceway grounding shall be in accordance with Section 8, Grounding.

4.5 METAL WIREWAYS

4.4.1 Metal wireways shall comply with all applicable articles or sections of the national
electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, and ANCE, which include NEC
Article 376, CEC Section 12-2100 and ANSI/UL 870.

4.4.2 Metal wireways shall be rigidly supported, accessible and shall conform to the
following:

1. Wireways shall be oil-tight and gasketed, equivalent to NEMA 12


construction.
2. Metal thickness shall be a minimum 14 gauge.
3. Covers on wireways shall be hinged, shaped to overlap the sides and held
closed by captive screws of other suitable fasteners exterior to the wireways.
For sections mounted horizontally, the covers shall be on top. All covers shall
be capable of opening at least 90 degrees.
4. Wireways with knockouts are not acceptable. Only such openings as are
required for wiring the equipment shall be provided.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 42 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.6 CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS

4.6.1 General

4.6.1.1 Cable trays shall comply with all applicable articles or sections of the national
electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, and ANCE, which include NEC
Article 392, CEC Section 12-2200 and ANSI/NEMA VE 1 Metal Cable Tray
Systems, except as otherwise specified herein.

4.6.1.2 Cable tray installations shall be in accordance with NEMA VE 2 Metal Cable Tray
Installation Guidelines.

4.6.1.3 The cable tray system shall be electrically continuous in accordance with the
requirements of the NEC, CEC and MEC and grounded in accordance with the
requirements of Section 8, Grounding.

4.6.1.4 Prior to installation, the installer shall furnish a detailed layout of the cable tray
system showing mounting heights, spacing of supports, catalog numbers of all
components (including supports), for the approval of the Purchasing Division. For
outdoor installations, the layout of the cable tray system shall be furnished by the
cable tray manufacturer.

4.6.1.5 The installer shall provide and install a complete cable tray system as indicated in
contract documents. The design and arrangement of the cable tray system shall be
coordinated with the design and location of all structures, and equipment shall be
installed with all bends, offsets and supports, etc., as required to avoid conflicts
with the work of other trades.

4.6.1.6 Cable tray shall be designed and constructed to limit the deflection to 1/240 of the
span using the simple beam method of calculation, when fully loaded with cables
as specified in the NEC, CEC, MEC and herein. All calculations shall be in
accordance with the Specifications for Aluminum Structures, Section 1, published
by the Aluminum Association, Inc. The calculations shall be based on bridge type
structures, utilizing the appropriate safety factors. Calculations shall be submitted
as a part of the manufacturer’s shop drawings for the cable tray system.

4.6.1.7 Cable trays shall support the specified cable, the requirements of Sections 4.6.3
and 4.6.4, and the following additional loads without causing a permanent
deformation.

1. The rungs and side members of a fully loaded tray section shall be capable of
withstanding the additional stresses resulting from a 200 pound concentrated
load in the center of a rung or at any location on a side rail without causing a
permanent deformation to the material.
2. The outdoor cable tray system shall also be designed to support, while fully
loaded, an alternate loading created by weather conditions. The alternate
loading shall consist of the weight due to a nominal 3/4 inch minimum ice
coating having a density of 57 pounds per cubic foot, 5 pounds per square
foot minimum snow load, and the wind pressure of 25 pounds per square foot

Template Revised 5-06 Page 43 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

minimum resulting from a basic wind speed of 90 mile per hour for 3 second
gusts. This weather related alternate loading conditions will not be concurrent
with the stresses of the 200 pound 91 Kilograms concentrated load.

4.6.1.8 Cable tray for power conductors shall be ladder type in width as shown in the
contract documents. The cable tray shall be uniformly constructed of Type 6063-T6
or 6061-T6 alloy aluminum with a maximum rung spacing of 18 inches. The rungs
shall be welded to the side members except that, for low voltage cable tray the
rungs may be fastened by another method. The minimum loading depth shall be as
specified in Sections 4.6.3 and 4.6.4. The cable tray system shall be complete
including manufacturer approved hangers, connecting materials, bends, expansion
joints, covers (when indicated in the contract documents), etc. Associated
hardware shall be of galvanized or zinc plated steel.

Note: The electrical resistance of a unit length of tray with a joint or splice shall be
no greater than the same length of tray without a splice.

4.6.1.8.1 Rung spacing closer than 18 inches as required to prevent cable sag shall be
provided where smaller diameter cables are installed in ladder type cable.

4.6.1.8.2 Curves and bends for the various cable tray classifications shall be fabricated with
a minimum radius in accordance with the following table.

Table 4-2

Cable Tray Minimum Bend Radius

Classification Minimum Radius


Low Voltage 36 inches
Medium Voltage 48 inches
Trough Type 24 inches

4.6.1.8.3 Cable tray side members shall have the same height and cross sectional shape
throughout the installation. Higher or heavier side members shall be used where
required for long spans. Where the height is increased for long spans, the height of
adjacent curves and other fittings shall also be increased to match the higher
straight lengths. Side members shall have outward-facing bottom flanges so that
the cable tray can be attached to supports without interfering with cable pulling or
free expansion of the cable tray.

4.6.1.9 Tray installations shall be suitably supported and sway braced to provide a rigid
and safe installation. Unless otherwise indicated, the cable tray shall be installed
using a trapeze type support. Hanger rods shall not be less than ½ inch diameter.
Supports, sway bracing, and cable tray attachments to steel, concrete, etc., shall
be in accordance with Section 9, Fasteners and Supports.

4.6.1.10 All brackets, clamps, rods, fittings and other support accessories shall be
galvanized or zinc plated. Install neoprene spacers to prevent contact between

Template Revised 5-06 Page 44 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

aluminum and galvanized surfaces in wet areas. Secure spacers to prevent loss of
spacers with tray movement.

4.6.1.11 All lengths, fittings and other components shall be coupled by high-pressure splice
plates to provide adequate electrical conductivity. Splice joints shall be located not
more than 3 feet from a support. An anti-oxidant joint compound shall be used on
each splice plate.

4.6.1.12 Cable tray installed within the interior of a building shall be located above the
bottom chord of truss and shall be run parallel and perpendicular to walls,
structural members and intersections of vertical planes and ceilings.

4.6.1.13 Cable tray shall not be run directly under building trusses in a manner that would
prevent structural steel from being added at a later date.

4.6.1.14 Ladder rungs of vertical trays shall have a minimum clearance of ½ inch from walls,
floors and other surfaces to allow for clamping the cables to the rungs.

4.6.1.15 Electrical raceway installations above cable tray shall not be closer than 18 inches.
Sufficient space shall be provided and maintained about cable trays to permit
adequate access for installing and maintaining the cables.

4.6.1.16 Trays shall be located at least 18 inches from any piping such as gas, water and
steam lines. Installation of trays below gas, water and steam lines and in high
ambient temperature areas above 120 degrees Fahrenheit shall be avoided.

4.6.1.17 Expansion joints shall be installed at building expansion locations and in


accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The maximum spacing of
expansion joints for indoor tray shall be 120 feet in any run without bends. The
spacing for outdoor tray shall be between 60 feet and 75 feet. Expansion joints for
outdoor tray shall be located not more than 30 feet from a change in elevation or
direction. Expansion joints installed outdoors shall provide for at least 2 inches of
movement. Supports shall be located on both sides of expansion joints,
approximately 1 foot from the joint. The cable tray system shop drawings shall list
the gap dimension settings required at the expansion joints. The installer shall
measure the ambient temperature at the time of setting the gap at each individual
expansion joint and shall adjust each setting according to manufacturer’s
instructions. The expansion joints shall be equipped with bonding jumpers on each
side having an ampacity of not less than 480 amperes in open air. Grounding
jumpers shall be EC grade, extra-flexible stranded aluminum and bolted to each
side rail across expansion fittings in aluminum tray.

4.6.1.18 For outdoor cable tray, the aluminum members shall be separated from the steel
supports by a minimum 1/16-inch thick nylon or Mylar material. Tray shall be
secured to supports with retaining clips, which are designed to permit longitudinal
travel of the cable tray side members. Secure spacers to prevent loss of spacers
with tray movement.

4.6.1.19 Over roof cable tray systems shall provide a minimum air clearance of 60 inches
between the bottom of tray or support steel and the roof deck.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 45 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.6.2 Cable Tray (Low Voltage)

4.6.1.2.1 Low voltage cable tray shall have a minimum loading depth of 4 inches.

4.6.1.2.2 Deflection calculations shall be based on fully loaded cable tray, taking in account
the number and types of cables installed in the tray and any future tray loading. In
the event cable tray is being installed for future use only, calculations shall be
based on fully loaded cable tray with 600 volt-insulated, 500 kcmil interlocked
armored copper cables, each 2.4 inches in diameter and weighing 7.5 pounds per
linear foot.

4.6.3 Cable Tray (Medium Voltage)

4.6.1.3.1 Medium voltage cable tray shall have a minimum loading depth of 5 inches.

4.6.1.3.2 Deflection calculations shall be based on fully loaded cable trays with cables
spaced at ¼ of the cable diameter. The cables shall be 15 KV-insulated, 500 kcmil
interlocked armored copper cables, each 4 inches in diameter and weighing 10
pounds per linear foot. Deflection calculations shall include the additional load of a
6-feet long cable tap box weighing 500 pounds located with one end at the span
support.

4.6.1.3.3 For medium voltage cable tray systems, operating voltage and warning signs shall
be installed on the tray in accordance with Section 11, Painting, Identification,
Arc Flash and Lockout Energy Control.

4.6.4 Trough Tray Cable Tray System

4.6.1.4.1 Trough type cable tray shall be uniformly constructed of aluminum alloy with a
ventilated corrugated bottom and a minimum loading depth of 5 inches. The bottom
shall be welded to the side members. Curves and bends shall be fabricated with
minimum radius of 24 inches unless otherwise indicated in contract documents.
The cable tray system shall be installed complete, including hangers, connecting
material, bends, expansion joints, trough drop out bushings, aluminum barrier
strips, clips, etc., with associated hardware of galvanized of zinc plated steel.

4.6.1.4.2 Deflection calculations shall be based on the tray’s use and worst case fill
conditions.

4.6.5 Basket Tray Cable Tray System (Communications and Low Voltage)

4.6.1.5.1 Basket tray may be used for data centers and manufacturing equipment if specified
and approved by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

4.6.1.5.2 Basket tray is not designed to provide a rigid and safe installation for pulling cables
into the tray. Cables shall be laid into the tray. Basket tray shall be located below
the bottom chord of truss.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 46 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.6.1.5.3 Basket tray shall be carbon steel wire, ASTM A 510, Grade 1008. The wire shall be
welded, bent and surface treated. The finish for the tray after welding and bending
shall be Electrodeposited Zinc Plating: ASTM B 633, Type III, SC-1.

4.6.1.5.4 Basket tray shall consist of a continuous, rigid, welded steel wire mesh cable
management system, to allow continuous ventilation of cables and maximum
dissipation of heat, with UL classified splices. Wire mesh basket tray shall have
continuous T-welded top side wire to protect the cable insulation and installers.

4.6.1.5.5 Provide splices, supports and other fittings necessary for a complete, continuously
grounded system.

4.6.1.5.6 Basket tray requirements are the following:

1. The cable management system shall be supported in accordance with NEMA


VE 1, with a safety factor of 1.5. The cable tray shall be capable of carrying a
uniformly distributed load based on the support span, according to load tests
of the NEMA VE 1 Standard.
2. Tray design shall include varying wire sizes to meet application load
requirements; to optimize tray strength; and to allow tray to remain lightweight.
3. Cable tray shall be filled to 40% of total fill capacity and shall be sized to
accommodate future cabling changes and additions.
4. Tray sizes shall range from a minimum of 2 inches wide by 1 inch deep to a
maximum of 24 inches wide by 6 inches deep.
5. The tray mesh shall be 2 x 4 inches.
6. Straight section lengths shall be 118 inches.
7. Provide the construction of side wire to protect cable insulation and installers’
hands.
8. Wire mesh cable tray fittings shall be field fabricated from straight tray
sections, in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

4.6.1.5.7 The installer shall provide all necessary labor, materials, tools, and equipment to
perform the following:

1. All “L” wall brackets shall be affixed to the wall at a stud position.
2. 90 degree bends shall be junction and elbow types.
3. All cable dropouts shall include a nut and bolt to insure they are secure.
4. All “T’s” and junctions shall be grounded with a jumper wire to both pieces.
5. The tray system shall be suspended at least 6” above the top of any data
rack.
6. The basket tray system shall be supported a minimum of every 5 feet.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 47 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.6.6 Cable Transits

4.6.6.1 The cable tray system shall be equipped with fire rated multiple cable transits to
serve as a weather tight fire barrier and to prevent infiltration of dust and other
foreign material into the equipment room, when cables pass through wall openings.
Do not install cable trays continuous through permanent walls.

4.6.6.2 The multiple cable transits shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation and shall consist of transit frame, compression bolt, compression
plates, insert blocks, end packing, etc. as required for a complete installation.

4.6.6.2.1 Where cable passes through an insert block, sealer shall be applied in the grooves
of each block to seal the space between the insert block and the cable sheath. The
sealer shall be as recommended by the cable transit manufacturer.

4.6.6.2.2 Ground cable transits to cable tray at both ends.

4.7 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)

4.7.1 General

4.7.1.1 Duct banks and direct burial conduits shall not be installed below floor slabs unless
otherwise specified by the Purchasing Division.

4.7.1.2 Crushed or deformed conduits shall not be installed and avoid trapped runs in
damp or wet locations.

4.7.1.3 Rigid nonmetallic PVC conduit (RNC) duct joints shall be made with solvent welded
couplings in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and Section
4.2.7, Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit. This operation shall be performed one length at a
time in the trench. Pre-assembly outside the trench shall not be accepted.

4.7.1.4 Where conduit joints occur in concrete slabs, or in damp or wet locations, make
joints watertight by applying an approved compound on the entire thread area
before assembling. Draw up all conduit joints as tightly as possible.

4.7.1.5 Provide conduit adapters for connection of conduit of different materials.

4.7.1.6 Conduit field bends shall be made without reducing the inside diameter of the
conduit. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and straight legs of offsets parallel,
unless otherwise indicated.

4.7.1.7 The minimum radius of the curve of any conduit field bend to the centerline of the
conduit for elbows, bends or offsets shall not be less than 36 inches for three inch
and larger conduit, and 24 inches for conduit smaller than 3 inch. Arrange so that
curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished grade or slab.

4.7.1.8 Underground system grounding shall be in accordance with Section 8, Grounding.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 48 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.7.1.9 Boxes installed in concrete shall be accurately located and anchored securely to
reinforcing steel and forms to prevent shifting when concrete is poured.

4.7.1.10 Cut a tapered end on conduits or duct, if the ends are not parallel to the penetrated
surface. The cut shall be made with a tool or lathe designed to cut a taper to match
the taper of the particular duct used.

4.7.1.11 Identify cable groups and conduit at entering and leaving locations in handholes by
means of 1/8 inch thick die-stamped tags with punched ears. Fasten tags around
the cable group or conduit with nylon cable ties.

4.7.2 Excavation and Backfilling

4.7.2.1 Excavations shall be adequately and properly shored, braced and sheathed to
prevent cave-in and settlement of adjoining soil, wall or footings.

4.7.2.2 The depth of the duct bank or conduit run, measured from the top of the concrete
envelope or conduit to the finished grade at the top of the trench, shall not be less
than 30 inches. A minimum clearance of 12 inches shall be maintained between
the conduit structure and any gas, water or other pipes.

4.7.2.3 The floor of the duct or conduit trench shall be rammed until solid and then leveled
off and graded to provide uniform drainage of the ducts or conduits. Grade shall be
not less than 3 inches per 100 feet. Duct lines shall not be tapped between
manholes for drainage.

4.7.2.4 The final grade bottom of the direct burial conduit trench shall not be less than 3
inches below the level at which conduit is to be installed. Provide a 3 inch minimum
compacted sand bed in bottom of trench preparatory to installing conduit. Install
conduit as specified, with spacing as indicated, on the sand bed, and cover with a
minimum of 3 inches of sand. Make conduit joints watertight. Use Type NS sand
and compact. Refer to GM Onespec, Division 1, Section “Soils and Aggregates”.

4.7.2.5 Provide a concrete cover for direct burial conduits not less than 2 inches thick and
of a width equal to the overall dimension of the installed conduit on top of the sand
cover.

4.7.2.6 Fill the remainder of the direct burial conduits trench, and carefully tamp, with
materials and compaction methods to suit project conditions. Refer to GM Onespec,
Division 1, Section “Soils and Aggregates”.

4.7.2.7 Backfilling of the duct bank trench shall be deposited in layers, tamped and
compacted. The first layer of backfill above the raceway shall be 6 inches of
suitable sand or gravel. For pavement or future building areas, material shall be
placed in 6-inch thick compacted layers and compacted to 95 percent relative
density as determined by the Modified Proctor Test (ASTM D-1557). For unpaved
areas backfill material shall be placed in 12 inch compacted layers and compacted
to 85 percent relative density. Backfill material shall exclude pieces of wood or
other debris and rocks.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 49 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.7.2.8 Install yellow hazard warning tape directly above each direct buried conduit or duct
bank located 12 inches below finished grade. Install tape continuously with overlap
where splices are needed. Provide non-adhesive, 6 inch wide, polyethylene tape
with black lettering which reads “CAUTION – BURIED ELECTRICAL LINE” OR
CAUTION – BURIED TELEPHONE LINE” as appropriate. Where conduit is
installed below finished floor slab, warning tape shall be placed within the top 4
inches below the slab.

4.7.3 Cinder Fill

4.7.3.1 Conduits shall be kept clear of cinder fill.

4.7.3.2 Where necessary to run conduit in or under cinder fill, protect on all sides by a
sand-cement envelope having a minimum thickness of 3 inches. The proportion of
the mix shall be 1 part cement to 8 parts sand.

4.7.4 Testing Conduit for Obstructions

4.7.4.1 All new underground conduits and existing conduit where cables are to be added
shall be cleaned and tested in accordance with Section 4.7.5. In addition, a nylon
pull chord shall be installed in each conduit after cleaning.

4.7.5 Empty Conduit

4.7.5.1 Prevent the entrance of water and the lodging of concrete, plaster, dirt or trash in
conduit, boxes, fittings and equipment during the course of construction. Replace
conduit to eliminate conduit obstructions.

4.7.5.2 Empty conduits installed underground shall be tested for obstructions at project
completion or prior to installation of pull wire. Pull a standard flexible mandrel not
less than 12 inches long and having a diameter approximately 1/4 inch less than
the inside diameter of the conduit through each conduit, and then pull a brush with
stiff bristles through each conduit to make certain that no particles of earth, sand or
gravel have been left in the conduit (The wire brush shall not be used with PVC
conduit).

4.7.5.3 Empty conduit systems shall be sealed using a standard galvanized malleable iron
pipe cap during and after construction to prevent water, mud and debris from
entering conduit.

4.7.5.4 Conduits which terminate in floors, walls of trenches, pits or tunnels shall terminate
with a coupling installed flush with the finished surface. In conduits at which no
other connections are made, a slotted and threaded brass plug shall be provided
and installed flush with the surface.

4.7.5.5 Threads of pipe caps and plugs shall be fully coated with a conductive, copper
bearing, protective, anti-seizing compound.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 50 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.7.6 Vertical Conduit Risers

4.7.6.1 The underground ducts shall be extended up to the truss area of the building with
rigid steel conduit, encased in a concrete envelop to a height of 8 feet minimum
above floor or as indicated in contract documents. The concrete envelope shall be
reinforced at corners with angle iron and shall be substantially tied in to the building
structure.

4.7.7 Underground Duct Banks (Concrete Encased)

4.7.7.1 Nonmetallic ducts for concrete encasement shall be sized per contract documents
and shall be rigid nonmetallic PVC conduit (RNC) in accordance with Section 4.2.7,
Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit. Ducts shall be placed at elevations indicated in the
contract documents, in alignment, and with duct joints staggered at six inch
intervals minimum.

4.7.7.2 Rigid steel conduit (RSC) shall be provided at bends greater than 15 degrees,
risers, and at other locations as indicated.

4.7.7.3 Form single conduits as specified into duct banks as shown and encase in
concrete. Use preformed duct spacers. Lay conduit to grades indicated. Stagger
joints 6 inches vertically and horizontally in duct runs and make joints watertight.
Provide end bells where ducts enter handholes if required.

4.7.7.4 Ducts shall be spaced to allow a minimum of three inches of concrete to surround
each duct in a bank. The ducts shall be spaced by means of standard preformed
duct spacers located at intervals of not more than 5 feet along the duct formation.
Ducts shall be terminated in nonmetallic duct end-bells in handholes if required.

4.7.7.4.1 Ducts and spacers shall be securely tied town to prevent movement or flotation
during the concrete pour.

4.7.7.5 Reinforcing steel shall be used in duct structures when indicated in the contract
documents. All reinforcing steel shall be deformed new billet steel bars conforming
to ASTM A-615 Grade 60 or ASTM A-616 Grade 60. All steel shall be tagged and
marked in accordance with ASTM A-615. The design, construction, detailing,
fabricating and placing of all reinforcing steel shall be accordance with the current
edition of the America Concrete Institute Standard Building Code Requirements for
Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318) and ACI Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing
Reinforced Concrete Structures (ACI 315). Reinforcing steel shall be coated to
prevent corrosion.

4.7.7.6 The concrete for encasing monolithic conduit structures and pole bases shall be
mixed using Type 1 Portland cement conforming to ASTM designation C-150.
Aggregate shall be crushed stone, air-cooled blast furnace slab, gravel and natural
or manufactured sand. Aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. The concrete shall
have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 pounds per square inch in 28 days.
Water used shall be clean and free of all deleterious matter. The cement content of
the design mix may be reduced accordingly to produce the required concrete;
however, the minimum cement content shall not be less than 5 ½ sacks (517

Template Revised 5-06 Page 51 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

pounds) per cubic yard of concrete using ¾ inch maximum size aggregate. Transit
or ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with the
requirements set forth in the Standard Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete,
ASTM designation C-94. Provide proper additives to retard or accelerate the
concrete curing process in accordance with ASTM designation C-494,
Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete, may be used during high
(above 70 degrees F.) or low (below 40 degrees F.) temperature durations.

4.7.7.7 Careful attention shall be given to the placing of concrete around conduit so that
there are no void spaces. A flat tool or spatula or suitable mechanical vibrator shall
be constantly and carefully worked up and down between the conduit to work the
concrete into place. Where it is necessary to construct forms to retain the concrete
pour, special care shall be taken to eliminate all openings through which the thin
grout may escape.

4.7.7.8 Where the trench is wider than the conduit structure, tight substantial forms shall
be placed to provide rigid support until the concrete has set. Otherwise, it shall be
required that the entire width of the trench be filled with concrete to a level at least
3 inches above the top of the conduit structure.

4.7.7.9 Where duct banks enter buildings, the last 10-foot section shall be rigid steel
conduit to provide a complete metal raceway system within the building unless
otherwise specified by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

4.7.8 Direct Burial Conduit

4.7.8.1 Rigid nonmetallic schedule 40 PVC conduit (RNC) shall be provided for direct
burial applications unless otherwise specified. Plastic jacketed rigid steel conduit
(PJRSC) or rigid nonmetallic schedule 80 PVC conduit (RNC), as specified by the
Purchasing Division, shall be provided under and within five feet of heavy bearing
surfaces such as highways, railway right-of-ways and other high load stressed
areas. Extend conduit a minimum of 5 feet beyond each edge of the high stress
area. RNC conduit shall comply with Section 4.2.7, Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit.

4.7.8.2 PJRSC shall be provided at bends greater than 15 degrees, within 5 feet of
building walls, at points of strain, and at other locations as indicated. PJRSC shall
comply with Section 4.2.6, Plastic Jacketed Rigid Steel Conduit.

4.7.9 Handholes

4.7.9.1 General

4.7.9.1.1 Prefabricated, non-concrete handholes may be used when approved by the


PURCHASING DIVISION.

4.7.9.1.2 Duct terminals in handhole or other concrete walls shall be formed and poured as
an integral part of the structure in which they terminate.

4.7.9.1.3 Provide end bells where ducts enter handholes unless otherwise specified by the
Purchasing Division.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 52 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.7.9.1.4 Power distribution handholes shall have the word “Electric” cast in the center of the
cover in suitably large letters. Handholes shall have a minimum 32-inch diameter
opening.

4.7.9.1.5 In unpaved areas, install handhole frame and cover such that top of cover (rim) is 2
inches above finish grade. In paved areas, install handhole frame and cover such
that top of cover (rim) is flush with finish grade.

4.7.9.1.6 All work including the installation of cable racks, brackets, shelves, hangers and
junction boxes shall be completed before the installation of cable.

4.7.9.1.7 All grounding in handholes shall be in accordance with Section 8, Grounding.

4.7.9.2 Precast Handholes

4.7.9.2.1 Precast handholes shall be constructed with Interlocking reinforced concrete


sections having interior clear dimensions not less than indicated, designed to meet
or exceed AASHTO interim specification 1972, load factor design and ACI Code
318-71 (USD) where applicable, and complete with double seals at intersections,
duct openings approximately as indicated, pulling irons opposite duct faces and in
center of floor, opening for ground rod, equipment mounting means, and means for
securing concrete throat and handhole cover frame to the reinforcing steel in the
roof of the handhole.

4.7.9.2.2 Concrete shall be a high-early type having a minimum compressive strength of


4500 PSI.

4.7.9.2.3 Reinforcing shall be a grade 60 per Bell Laboratory Specification, bonded together,
and provided with strapping exposed in the handhole for connection to the
grounding system.

4.7.9.3 Cast-in-place Handholes

4.7.9.3.1 Cast-in-place handholes shall be constructed with steel reinforced concrete. Steel
reinforcing shall be provided between the handholes and duct bank. All inserts
such as handholes cover frames, etc., shall be cast in the concrete as required.

4.7.9.3.2 Cast-in-place handhole forms shall be constructed of construction grade lumber or


steel, with ample bracing to prevent distortion during and after the pouring concrete.

4.7.9.3.3 Reinforcing steel shall be used in manhole and handhole structures when indicated
in the contract documents. All reinforcing steel shall be deformed new billet steel
bars conforming to ASTM A-615 Grade 60 or ASTM A-616 Grade 60. All steel shall
be tagged and marked in accordance with ASTM A-615. The design, construction,
detailing, fabricating and placing of all reinforcing steel shall be accordance with
the current edition of the America Concrete Institute Standard Building Code
Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (ACI 318) and ACI Manual of Standard
Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures (ACI 315).

Template Revised 5-06 Page 53 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.7.9.3.4 The concrete for handhole structures shall be mixed using Type 1 Portland cement
conforming to ASTM designation C-150. Aggregate shall be crushed stone, air-
cooled blast furnace slab, gravel and natural or manufactured sand. Aggregate
shall conform to ASTM C-33. The concrete shall have a minimum compressive
strength of 3000 pounds per square inch in 28 days. Water used shall be clean and
free of all deleterious matter. The cement content of the design mix may be
reduced accordingly to produce the required concrete; however, the minimum
cement content shall not be less than 5 ½ sacks (517 pounds) per cubic yard of
concrete using ¾ inch maximum size aggregate. Transit or ready-mixed concrete
shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with the requirements set forth in the
Standard Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete, ASTM designation C-94.
Provide proper additives to retard or accelerate the concrete curing process in
accordance with ASTM designation C-494, Specification for Chemical Admixtures
for Concrete, may be used during high (above 70 degrees F.) or low (below 40
degrees F.) temperature durations.

4.7.10 Handhole Waterproofing

4.7.10.1 Cast-in-place handholes shall have membrane waterproofing on the outside of all
handhole walls in accordance with the requirements of GM Onespec, Division 7,
Section “Elastomeric Membrane Waterproofing”.

4.7.10.2 Precast handholes shall have waterproof section joints, duct entrances, and joints
at top and bottom of poured concrete throats. Provide field waterproofing resin
(Sika Corp., Sikadur 31) with waterproofing fabric for reinforcing. Apply
waterproofing in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and as follows:

1. Apply resin sealer only when surfaces are clean, dry and sound, and free
from dust, laitance, grease, waxes, foreign particles and disintegrated
materials. Wire brush all such surfaces and remove fines with clean, dry fiber
brushes immediately before waterproofing.
2. Prior to waterproofing operation, cut the reinforcing fabric in minimum 6 inch
wide strips for placing over joints in concrete.
3. Immediately before use, mix the two components of the resin together with a
low speed electric mixer until the material attains uniform color and
consistency. Mix for three minutes, taking care to scrape bottom and sides of
container. Use the following methods of application.
4. On handhole section joints, apply a 10 mil coat of resin on joints and extend
coating a minimum of three inches each side of the joint. Embed a continuous
strip of fabric in the resin, centered on the joint. Lap fabric ends a minimum of
one inch. Apply a second 10 mil coat of resin and a second fabric strip,
stagger joints in fabric.
5. On throat joints, apply materials in same manner as for handhole section
joints.
6. At duct entrances, after placing duct in new openings and immediately before
pouring concrete, coat entire duct entrance pocket with resin to bond new
concrete to precast concrete. Cover all areas of contact between precast and

Template Revised 5-06 Page 54 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

new concrete with resin. Cover all unused entrances with resin to prevent
water seepage through cup entrances.

4.7.11 Handhole Cable Racks

4.7.11.1. Cable racks, hooks and full circuit voltage rated insulators shall be provided and
installed in all handholes for the support of cables. Cable racks shall be spaced a
maximum of 30 inches center to center.

4.7.11.2. Cable racks shall be standard type, constructed of steel channel malleable iron,
hot-dipped galvanized, complete with cable support insulators. Cable rack
insulators shall be designed to fit the cable rack arms.

4.7.11.3. Cable rack arms shall be designed to carry cables on cable rack insulators. They
shall be installed with a minimum distance of 12 inches between centers of
horizontal supporting arms to provide ample room for splicing of cables.

4.7.11.4. The vertical length of racks shall provide an adequate number of slots for properly
spaced cable rack arms to carry all present and future cables. Vertical racks shall
extend to within 6 inches from top and bottom of the handhole.

4.7.11.5. Cable rack arms and all metallic supports shall be grounded as specified in
Section 8, Grounding.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 55 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

5. MEDIUM VOLTAGE WIRING (ABOVE 600 VOLTS)

5.1 GENERAL

5.1.1 Cable shall comply with the applicable provisions stated in the standards of the
following consensus organizations: ASTM, UL, CSA, ANCE, ICEA, NEMA, OESC,
and GM 5E, Medium Voltage Armor Power Cable and GM 6E, Triplexed and Pre-
assembled Aerial Medium Voltage Power Cable. Material, construction data,
insulation thickness and test data shall be submitted for Purchasing Division
approval.

5.1.2 Cable and cable installations shall comply with all applicable articles and sections
of the National Electrical Code (NEC), Canadian Electrical Code (CEC), or
Mexican Electrical Code (MEC) as appropriate.

5.1.3 The installer shall provide a high quality and reliable cable installation by
referencing the Purchasing Division’s specifications and the manufacturer’s
installation requirements to become familiar with the cable design details and
limitations.

5.2 CABLE REEL IDENTIFICATION

5.2.1 Cables shall be delivered on reels plainly marked with complete identification,
including cable size, number of conductors, type of cable, length, weight, insulation
thickness, character of the insulation, minimum bending radius, pulling tension and
sidewall pressure ratings, name of manufacturer and date of manufacture.

5.3 CABLE TYPES

5.3.1 Cables installed in overhead cable trays shall be interlocked armor cable as
specified in GM 5E.

5.3.2 In underground duct banks and overhead conduit installations, cables shall be
triplex type as specified in GM 6E.

5.3.2.1 Where triplex cable is not available, the GM 6E specifications shall be met using
single conductor GM 6E cables plus a ground wire, sized per GM 6E, in the same
conduit. The ground wire shall be provided whether the system is grounded or
ungrounded.

5.3.2.2 When installing triplex cables or single conductors, care shall be taken during cable
pulling to keep the phase conductors in the same relative position and the ground
conductor in the interstice between the phase conductors.

5.3.3 The cable ampacity shall be determined using applicable NEC, CEC, OESC, MEC,
ICEA, or IEEE-835 tables and methods.

5.3.4 Medium voltage conductors shall not be less than 4/0 AWG or greater than 500
kcmil unless otherwise approved by Purchasing Division.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 56 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

5.3.5 Cables installed on circuits operating at voltages above 2,400 volts shall be
shielded.

5.3.6 Medium voltage cables shall be tested in accordance with Section 12,
Inspections and Field Acceptance Tests.

5.3.7 Paper and varnished cambric insulated hermetically sealed aluminum (CCW) or
copper sheathed (LC) cables shall require approval of Purchasing Division.
Applications where this type of cable may be considered are for existing
installations where solid dielectric type is not applicable or for new installations
requiring a lead sheath due to environmental conditions.

5.3.8 Overhead cable installations on messenger cable shall require approval of the
PURCHASING DIVISION. In no case shall ring-type supports be allowed for
supporting primary cables. The supporting messenger must be interlaced with the
primary cable conductors such that no stress points exist on the cable insulation.

5.4 MINIMUM BENDING RADII

5.4.1 The minimum bending radii for single-conductor shielded cables shall be 12 times
the outer diameter of the cable. For single conductor non-shielded cables the
minimum bending radii shall be 8 times the outer diameter. The minimum bending
radii for multiconductor cables shall be 48 inches.

5.5 HANDLING AND INSTALLATION OF CABLES

5.5.1 General

5.5.1.1 Small cables reels shall be lifted only by placing a steel bar of adequate strength
through the axis of the reel and then lifting from this bar. Lifting of slings placed
around the cable reels, by fork trucks or other means, where the lifting force is not
applied directly to the axis of the reel, shall not be allowed. The cable reel shall not
be moved by rolling. Where large reels are shipped on cradles, the reels shall
remain in cradles and cradles shall be lifted.

5.5.1.2 The cables shall not be impacted, kicked, or sharply bent.

5.5.1.3 The installer shall take all necessary precautions to make sure that no damage will
result while handling cable prior to and during installation. Extra care should be
taken when cables are installed in low temperatures. Cables shall be kept in
heated storage 24 hours before installation and be pulled more slowly during the
installation. Cables shall not be installed at ambient temperatures lower than 14
degrees Fahrenheit.

5.5.1.4 Medium voltage cables shall be installed in accordance with the cable
manufacturer’s requirements including, but not limited to, pulling tension, sidewall
pressure and ambient temperature during installation.

5.5.1.5 The installer shall coordinate with the cable manufacturer and submit cable pulling
calculations for cable runs less than 1000 feet to the PURCHASING DIVISION for
approval prior to pulling the cable.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 57 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

5.5.1.6 For cable installation runs over 1000 feet or any run with more than 180 degrees of
bends, the manufacturer shall provide pulling calculations and field supervision.
The installer shall submit a written narrative and sketches showing fully the
proposed cable pulling procedure. The cable manufacturer shall review the
installer’s written narrative and sketches and shall provide calculations for the
pulling tensions and sidewall pressures to the Architect-Engineer. In addition, the
cable manufacturer’s representative shall review and approve the installation site
and installing procedures prior to the cable installation, and shall be on site to
monitor the pull.

5.5.1.7 Cable installations shall utilize factory installed pulling eyes and an approved
power winch unit equipped with a tension meter.

5.5.1.8 The cable manufacturer shall make three feet of cable available at both ends for
field testing.

5.5.1.9 When cable is cut in the field prior to installation, the open ends of the cable shall
be sealed with cable manufacturer’s approved end cap immediately to prevent the
entrance of moisture.

5.5.1.10 During installation, primary cable shall not lay on bare grade. Plywood sheets shall
be provided to protect the cable. Precautions must be taken to prevent damage to
cable and cable PVC jacket.

5.5.1.11 Cable lubricant shall be applied to the pulling cable as well as the insulated cable
during installation. The lubricant shall be compatible with exposed cabling
materials, shall not gum, harden or cement to the duct or conduit. The cable
lubricant shall be in accordance with the cable manufacturer’s recommendations.

5.5.1.12 Pulling eyes installed in the field shall be attached to all conductors, which make up
the cable. Appropriate provisions shall be made to protect the ends of the cable
sheath from peeling or slipping.

5.5.1.13 Pulling cable rope and power winch shall be of sufficient size to allow for a
continuous pull of cable through a duct run, conduit or cable tray. The mechanical
stress placed upon the cable during installation shall not cause excessive twisting,
stretching, flexing, sidewall pressure or tension beyond the manufacturer’s
maximum limits for the cable.

5.5.1.14 Cable pulling tension shall be measured by a tension meter that has been
calibrated within the last 12 months and with high tensile indication. The tension
meter shall be connected to record the actual tension on the cable. The installer
shall provide the Purchasing Division with current calibration documents for the
tension meter.

5.5.1.15 When more than one cable is pulled, a record shall be made for each pull and the
tension meter shall be reset in the presence of the PURCHASING DIVISION
representative.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 58 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

5.5.1.16 Where cables are to be installed on cable trays or racks, sheave type guides shall
be used to control the position, tension, and the bending radius of the cable during
installation.

5.5.1.17 Rollers and sheaves shall be well oiled and freewheeling. Ball bearing types are
required.

5.5.1.18 Roller guides shall be installed such that they do not damage tray, racks or support
members.

5.5.1.19 Rollers shall be spaced approximately 6 to 8 feet along the horizontal runs to
prevent the cable from touching the tray, and sheaves shall be spaced 18 inches
on turns and bends.

5.5.1.20 Sheave assemblies shall be used when a large radius sheave cannot be applied.
Individual sheaves in the assembly shall have a minimum inside radius of 1.25
inches with at least one sheave per 20 degrees of the bend. A three-sheave
assembly shall not be used for a 90 degree bend.

5.5.1.21 The sheave assembly shall be assembled in a manner, which will result in a
minimum bending radius of 48 inches for the cable when pulling around inside
vertical or horizontal bends. Increasing the individual sheave radius will reduce
pulling tension and sidewall pressure.

5.5.1.22 When a cable is being installed, the sheath shall be continuously inspected for any
visible cracks or other mechanical damage. Upon discovery of such damage,
pulling shall be stopped and the Purchasing Division shall be notified.

5.5.2 Cable Installation in Tray

5.5.2.1 Multiconductor cables shall be installed with spacing equal to at least one cable
diameter of the largest cable, or as indicated in the contract documents. Space for
the addition of future cables shall be left clear.

5.5.2.2 Cables shall be properly installed in trays to allow for expansion and contraction of
cable under all conditions.

5.5.2.3 Cables shall be fastened to rungs at intervals of not more than 12 feet in horizontal
runs and 18 inches in vertical or sloped runs utilizing cable straps. The straps shall
be of the proper size for the cable and shall be of black nylon, which has been
specially formulated to minimize ultraviolet ray degradation.

5.5.2.4 Do not pull vertical sections of cable greater than 40 feet without providing support
rollers and sheaves to protect the cable from damage.

5.5.2.5 Where cable is installed in vertical cable tray, furnish and install special cable
supports to prevent excess sidewall pressure and tensile stressing of the cable,
and overloading of cable tray rungs. The special supports shall consist of cable
blocks clamped to cable tray devices of the proper length and rating connected to

Template Revised 5-06 Page 59 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

structural steel. The engineering details shall be coordinated with both the cable
manufacturer and the cable tray manufacturer.

5.5.2.6 Individual extensions of cable & tray to equipment shall be adequately supported in
a neat and workmanlike manner.

5.5.2.7 In placing cables in trays, crossover shall be accomplished by installing


supplemental tray above existing tray to avoid cable stacking.

5.5.2.8 Cable pairs (associated by primary selectivity) shall be run side by side in the tray
and shall have the same relative position unless otherwise specified by the
Purchasing Division.

5.5.3 Underground

5.5.3.1 Flexible guides of an appropriate size shall be used to lead the cable from the reel
into the duct mouth or conduit.

5.5.3.2 Sufficient cable shall be pulled into manholes to allow for proper training around
walls, expansion and contraction of cables, and an overlapping of cable at the
splice points, to assure undisturbed insulation within the splice area. Ends of
cables shall be arranged so that splices may be properly located with respect to
cable supports.

5.5.3.3 In passing cables through manholes, etc., care shall be taken to avoid crossover
so that each cable is accessible when placed on racks.

5.5.3.4 Cable shall be installed in a duct in the same relative position throughout the
underground system, unless otherwise indicated in contract documents. Cables
shall be installed in such a manner that all spare ducts are accessible for use in the
future. Alternate feeders shall be located on opposite sides of the manhole.

5.6 TERMINATIONS AND SPLICES

5.6.1 General

5.6.1.1 Terminations and splices shall be in accordance with GM 14E, 14ES, and with the
requirements specified by the PURCHASING DIVISION. All splices and
terminations shall be installed by qualified cable splicers. The contractor shall
provide 8 hours of training by the splice/termination kit manufacturer to all persons
making splices or terminations.

5.6.1.2 Splicing and terminating materials shall be purchased in sealed packages.


Packages shall not be opened until the particular splice or termination is to be
made. Connectors and lugs shall be tubular copper solderless compression type,
and shall be capable of accepting two compressions. Lugs shall be two-hole
NEMA standard dimension.

5.6.1.3 Cables to be spliced or terminated shall be trained and racked into their final
positions before any cable is cut. Splices between adjacent cables shall be

Template Revised 5-06 Page 60 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

staggered whenever possible. Cross phasing conductors from cable to cable shall
not be permitted.

5.6.1.4 When a cable is opened for splicing or terminating, the work of splicing or
terminating shall proceed immediately and continue uninterrupted until the splice or
termination is completed (including any sealing required).

5.6.1.5 No cable shall be opened prior to splicing or terminating. No splices or terminations


shall be made if exposed to damp or inclement weather, except in emergency
conditions required by the PURCHASING DIVISION. In such cases, a cable
splicers tent or other satisfactory means of protection shall be provided by the
installer.

5.6.1.6 Under no circumstance shall any work be performed in confined space areas
without the approval of authorized safety personnel.

5.6.1.7 Effective grounding connections shall be provided for all cable sheaths and
shielding in manholes, cable vaults, etc., and at each pothead, splice or termination.
Ground conductors shall be grounded to the grounding bus in switchgear, and
similar locations. For details of grounding requirements refer to Section 8,
Grounding.

5.6.2 Terminations

5.6.2.1 Terminations for shielded cables shall be equipped with stress cones or other
stress relief devices such as cold- or heat-shrink types.

5.6.2.2 For special installations, pothead and end bell terminations shall be Purchasing
Division approved and installed in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.

5.6.2.3 Armored cable terminators and all of the necessary support brackets within
switchgear enclosures shall be provided by the installer unless otherwise specified
in contract specifications. Terminators for armored cables shall be high strength
aluminum watertight type with high dielectric insulation bushing, unless otherwise
specified or required by environment. A positive high quality-grounding device shall
be provided to ground the terminator to the cable armor.

5.6.2.4 Cables within medium voltage equipment shall be supported at intervals not
exceeding four feet. There shall be a minimum of one cable support per cable.
Supports shall be installed only on the shielded portions of the cable.

5.6.2.5 Adequate crotch clearance for phase separation shall be provided and no bends
shall be allowed in the unshielded length of the cable or in the immediate area of
the stress relief cone. Cable bends shall comply with the minimum radius as
recommended by the cable manufacturer.

5.6.2.6 The terminal on the cable shielding tape ground strap shall not be close to or in
contact with the insulation or shield of any other phase conductor. Cross phasing of
unshielded conductors shall not be allowed. A minimum clearance in free air of at

Template Revised 5-06 Page 61 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

least 2 inches or ¼ inch per KV, whichever is greatest, shall be required between
any unshielded opposite phase conductor, and between any unshielded phase
conductor and ground.

5.6.2.7 A minimum clearance in free air of 1/4 Inch per KV shall be maintained between
any unshielded conductor and insulated phase buses. The minimum clearance in
free air between each unshielded conductor and any phase or ground conductor
shall be no less than 2 inches or 1/4 inch per KV phase to phase, which ever is
greater (for example 3-1/2 inches at 13.8KV). These values are based on fully
insulated bus and terminations. These minimum clearances in free air shall also be
maintained between any shield or shield grounding conductor and any unshielded
conductor or insulated phase bus. Refer to 14E, Appendix A-6, for an example of a
15KV termination of a substation.

5.6.2.8 Connections to insulated buses shall be fully insulated including portions of bus-
work left exposed for connection. Insulation shall be tape, properly rated insulating
boots, or other approved insulating means.

5.6.3 Splices

5.6.3.1 No splices will be permitted in cable except where cable lengths are limited by
maximum reel capacity or where specifically allowed by the PURCHASING
DIVISION to prevent cable damage from excess tension.

5.6.3.2 Where splices are necessary, an overlap of cable, prior to cutting, shall be
provided at the splice point to assure undisturbed insulation within the splice area.

5.6.3.3 Ends of cables to be spliced shall be cut so that they butt squarely together at the
centerline of the splice.

5.6.3.4 Splicing of cables containing migrating oils to non-migrating type cable shall use
connectors having a stop-type joint to prevent oil from passing through.

5.6.3.5 The metallic shielding, cable ground conductors and cable armor shall be bonded
together such that they are electrically continuous through the splice.

5.6.3.6 Mechanical protection for splices in armored cable shall be equivalent to the cable
armor that was removed. Mechanical protection provided shall be in accordance
with GM 14ES.

5.6.3.7 Outdoor exposed terminations in rubber insulated shielded cables shall be


equipped with rain shields.

5.6.3.8 Proper supports shall be provided at each splice. Splices in non-armored cables
shall not be supported directly on the splice as the weight of the cable may deform
the splice.

5.6.3.9 Splices in single conductor jacketed cables shall be taped sufficiently after
completion of the splice to provide a protective jacket equal in all respects to the
original cable jacket.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 62 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

5.6.3.10 Wiping solder for lead-sheathed cable splices and terminators shall be 40 percent
tin and 60 percent lead of the finest quality. Additional lead shall not be added to
dilute this proportion.

5.7 FIREPROOFING OF CABLES

5.7.1 Non-armored medium voltage cables in manholes, cable vaults, and primary boxes
without barriers shall be fire proofed in accordance with the best practices of the
trades. Fireproofing shall be made with two layers of half-lapped 3 M No. 7700 arc-
proofing tape held in place by band of No. 27 pressure sensitive glass tape, ½ inch
wide, placed 12 inches on centers.

5.7.2 The fireproofing shall be terminated approximately ½ inch from the duct end bell to
permit inspection of the cable at the duct entrance and to prevent the fire proofing
from interfering with the expansion and contraction of the cable.

5.8 IDENTIFICATION OF CABLES

5.8.1 Cables in each manhole, cable vaults, splice boxes, termination boxes, pull boxes,
raceway building entrances, etc., shall be provided with identification tags. Refer to
Section 11, Painting, Identification, Arc Flash and Lockout Energy Control.

5.9 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE TAP BOXES

5.9.1 Cable tap boxes shall be fabricated and tested in accordance with GM Standard
9E, Medium Voltage Cable Tap Box Air Insulated 15KV Class.

5.9.2 Tap boxes installed indoors shall be attached to the cable tray but shall also be
supported independently so as not to cause any deflection of the cable tray.

5.9.3 Tap boxes installed outdoors shall be attached to the cable tray and shall be
located with one end of the box at a cable tray support member.

5.9.4 Tap boxes shall be bonded to the cable tray and support steel with an external
bonding jumper.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 63 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

6. LOW VOLTAGE WIRING (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)

6.1 GENERAL

6.1.1 Wire and cable for general building use shall be single conductor stranded copper,
rated 600V, in accordance with applicable ASTM, UL, CSA, ANCE and
ICEA/NEMA standards for the type of wire and insulation specified.

6.1.2 Wire and cable shall be marked and labeled in accordance with NEC Article 310,
CEC Section 12-100 or MEC as applicable. Material, construction data, insulation
thickness and test data shall be submitted for Purchasing Division approval.

6.1.3 Wire and cable installations shall comply with all applicable articles and sections of
the NEC, CEC, or MEC as applicable.

6.1.4 Wire and cable shall be installed in conduit unless otherwise specified by the
Purchasing Division. Refer to Section 4, Raceway and Cable Tray Systems.

6.1.5 Install wiring only in completed raceway systems and when systems are protected
from the weather.

6.1.6 Wire and cable materials and installation for conveyors and process electrical
equipment, shall also comply with requirements of GM CCB-1.

6.1.7 Cable shall be run exposed on ceilings, trusses, walls, columns, etc. Cable shall be
installed level and plumb in neat symmetrical lines parallel to building column lines
or walls and closely following the building outline.

6.1.8 All horizontal overhead manufactured wiring shall be installed as high as possible
above the bottom chord of truss and not run above the top cord of truss, unless
otherwise approved by the Purchasing Division.

6.1.9 Communication cable shall be run in separate conduits, wireways and cable trays
from any power-wiring conductors, to minimize the possibility of interference with
signals.

6.1.10 Cable installations shall be in accordance with the cable manufacturer’s pulling
tension and sidewall pressure requirements.

6.1.11 Conductors passing through or terminating in junction boxes shall have sufficient
slack to allow conductors to be pulled across the entire length of the box plus a
minimum of 6 inches.

6.1.12 Wire and cable installed in cable tray or trough shall be rated type MC or TC.

6.1.13 All conductors except for control wiring shall be minimum size No. 12 AWG.

6.1.14 Where condensed vapors or liquids may collect on, or come in contact with, the
insulation on conductors, such insulation shall be of a type approved for use under

Template Revised 5-06 Page 64 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

such conditions. All conductor insulation shall be rated for the environment in which
it is installed.

6.1.15 Wire and cable shall be continuous in length and delivered in reels or in coils.
Reels and coils shall be plainly marked with complete identification, including the
wire or cable size, the number of conductors, the type of wire or cable, length,
weight, insulation thickness, type of the insulation, name of the manufacturer,
original date of manufacturer, original date of manufacture and UL, CSA, or ANCE
label as appropriate.

6.1.16 The minimum bending radii for single-conductor cables and multiconductor cables
shall not be less than the minimum recommended by ICEA and the manufacturer.

6.1.17 Install phase and neutral conductors of each branch or feeder circuit in a single
raceway except where paralleling circuits. Install paralleling circuits of identical
makeup and length as the paralleled circuit, and terminate conductors at the same
location, mechanically and electrically, at both ends, to ensure equal division of the
total current between conductors.

6.1.18 Cable lubricant shall be applied to the pulling cable as well as the insulated cable
during installation. The lubricant shall be compatible with exposed cabling
materials, shall not gum, harden or cement to the duct or conduit. The cable
lubricant shall be in accordance with the cable manufacturer’s recommendations.

6.2 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

6.2.1 Applications

6.2.1.1 Circuit conductor types shall be in accordance with the following:

1. Lighting branch circuits (not including underground) shall be rated


THHN/THWN-2 when installed in the U.S. or Mexico, and T90 when installed
in Canada.
2. Branch circuits 300 Volts and below shall be rated THHN/THWN-2 when
installed in the U.S. or Mexico, and T90 when installed in Canada.
3. All other feeder and branch circuit conductors above ground shall be rated
RHH/RHW-2 when installed in the U.S. or Mexico, and RW90 when installed
in Canada; underground conductors shall be rated RHH/RHW/USE-2 when
installed in the U.S. or Mexico, and RWU90 when installed in Canada.
4. Refer to Section 6.3 for control wiring applications.

6.2.2 Color Coding

6.2.2.1 All conductors shall be color coded as follows:

1. Black – line and load circuits, ac or dc, above 150 volts.


2. Red – ac control circuits, 150 volts and below.
3. Blue – dc control circuits, 150 volts and below.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 65 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4. Orange – All control circuits or wiring which may remain energized when the
main disconnecting means is in the off position.
5. Green (with or without a yellow stripe) – equipment grounding conductors
(non-current carrying).
6. White – Grounded (current carrying) circuit conductors.

6.2.3 Motor and Control Wire Identification

6.2.3.1 Motor and control wire identification shall be in accordance with the SAE Standard
for Electrical Equipment for Automotive Industrial Machinery, 2002 Edition, SAE
HS-1738.

6.3 CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING

6.3.1 All control wire and cable shall be minimum 19-strand copper with 600-volt
thermoplastic insulation.

6.3.2 Control conductors shall conform to one of the following:

1. In control enclosures, wiring shall conform to the requirements of SAE HS-


1738.
2. In raceways, wires shall be minimum No. 14 AWG type THHN/THWN.
3. Multiconductor Type SO or STO control circuit wiring shall be minimum No.
14 AWG.
4. Multiconductor control cable shall have individual conductor of Type
MTW/THHN/THWN construction and a jack similar to Type STO construction.
The minimum size shall be No. 16 AWG.

6.4 WIRING FOR SPECIAL TEMPERATURE APPLICATIONS

6.4.1 Wiring in high temperature areas shall be rated for the environment in which it is
installed.

6.4.2 Power and control wiring for heat and smoke release ventilators in foam and tire
storage areas and in other similar areas as indicated in contract documents shall
be type FEPB, 200 degrees Celsius, 600 volt rated, tinned, silver or nickel plated,
stranded copper conductors, silicone rubber or fluorinated ethylene propylene
insulated with a glass outer covering.

6.4.3 Wiring for final connection to incandescent fixtures, HID fixtures with remote
ballasts, and remote ballasts shall be type SF-2, 200 degrees Celsius, 600 volt
rated, stranded copper conductors and silicone rubber insulated.

6.5 PORTABLE CORDS

6.5.1 Portable cords for power wiring applications shall be 600-volt type SO or STO with
an integral grounding conductor, unless otherwise indicated by the PURCHASING
DIVISION.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 66 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

6.6 METAL-CLAD CABLE

6.6.1 Use of metal-clad cable shall require the approval of the PURCHASING DIVISION.

6.6.2 Metal-clad cable (Type MC) shall comply with all applicable articles or sections of
the national electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, ANCE, and NEMA,
which include NEC Article 330, UL 1569, and NEMA RV 1 Application and
Installation Guidelines for Armored Cable and Metal-Clad Cable, unless more
stringent specifications are indicated in this standard .

6.6.3 MC Cable shall be a factory assembly of two or more insulated circuit conductors
enclosed in an armor of interlocking metal tape or a smooth or corrugated metallic
sheath. The wiring system shall be #12 AWG minimum through # 8 AWG
maximum solid or stranded copper with 600 volt, 90 degrees Celsius insulation in a
metal-clad cable assembly. The make-up of MC Cable shall consist of circuit and
grounding conductors covered with thermoplastic or thermoset insulation with an
overall polypropylene or polyester cable assembly tape. The MC Cable armor shall
be aluminum alloy or galvanized steel.

6.6.4 MC Cable armor is not considered an acceptable equipment grounding conductor.


A separate stranded copper equipment grounding conductor sized in accordance
with NEC Article 250, CEC, or MEC as appropriate, shall be provided.

6.6.5 MC cable is permitted only for the following installations:

1. To facilitate wiring and afford protection of wires in metal partitions.


2. As a substitute for conduit and wire in wood or metal wall studs,
3. Installed in cable tray where identified for such use.

6.6.6 MC cable shall not be used under the following conditions:

1. Where subject to physical damage


2. In wet or damp locations
3. Where subject to corrosive environments
4. Underground or buried in concrete
5. In corrosive environments
6. In hazardous (classified) locations
7. Below the bottom chord of the truss, unless it is installed in cable tray.

6.6.7 MC cable shall be cut with an armored cable rotary cutter to prevent damage to
circuit conductors.

6.6.8 UL listed connectors shall be used to terminate MC cable. Set screw connectors
shall not be used on aluminum armor.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 67 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

6.6.9 Anti-shorting insulating bushings shall be used each time the outer jacket is cut for
termination.

6.7 MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS

6.7.1 Use of manufactured wiring systems shall require the approval of the
PURCHASING DIVISION.

6.7.2 Manufactured wiring systems are permitted only for the connection of lighting
fixtures above suspended ceilings, and above the bottom chord of trusses in
manufacturing and non-manufacturing areas.

Exception: MC Cable may be acceptable for the above application if approved by


the Purchasing Division.

Note: The connection devices used with manufactured wiring systems facilitate
ease of initial installation and future relocation of equipment such as luminaires.
These systems are used extensively for the installation of branch-circuit and tap
conductors supplying luminaires in accessible locations, including open and
suspended-ceiling construction.

6.7.3 Manufactured wiring systems shall not be used in the locations listed in Section
6.6.6.

6.7.4 Manufactured wiring systems shall comply with all applicable articles or sections of
the national electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, ANCE, and NEMA,
which include NEC Article 330 and Article 604, UL 1569, and NEMA RV 1
Application and Installation Guidelines for Armored Cable and Metal-Clad Cable,
unless more stringent specifications are indicated in this standard.

6.7.5 Manufactured wiring systems shall be a factory assembly of two or more insulated
circuit conductors enclosed in an armor of interlocking metal tape or a smooth or
corrugated metallic sheath. The wiring system shall be #12 AWG or # 10 AWG
copper with 600 volt, 90 degrees Celsius insulation in a metal-clad cable assembly.
The make-up of manufactured wiring systems shall consist of circuit and grounding
conductors covered with thermoplastic or thermoset insulation with an overall
polypropylene or polyester cable assembly tape. The cable armor shall be
aluminum alloy or galvanized steel. A copper ground conductor shall be run within
the assembly and connected to a grounding pin as well as the metallic enclosure.

6.7.6 Connectors shall be metal clad, tamper proof, embossed with system voltage, color
coded and polarized for voltage with five pins for use on 120/208 volt or 480/277
volt system. Connector shall employ a female receptacle with a distinct keyway
system to prevent engaging connectors on different system voltages. All unused
receptacle openings shall be effectively capped. All components must meet UL,
CSA, and ANCE requirements for connecting and disconnecting under load and be
UL listed as such.

6.7.7 The flexible wiring system shall be shipped with a protective closure cap on each
receptacle to prevent accidental contact with connectors or terminals during and

Template Revised 5-06 Page 68 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

after installation. The caps shall be made of non-flammable material and shall be
fastened securely in place. If caps are designed for one-time use, the manufacturer
shall ship additional 25% spare caps. The caps shall be approved by the
Purchasing Division prior to shipment of the equipment.

6.7.8 Provide, install and connect a manufactured wiring system consisting of


components required for a complete and functional installation. The system shall
be designed for parallel wiring so that failure of one luminaire, etc., will not affect
the operation of the remaining luminaires.

6.7.9 Provide connectors to the luminaire manufacturers for the luminaires to be used
with the flexible wiring system. Installation of connector in manufactured wiring
system shall be coordinated with installation of air handling boots for supply and
heat-removal of all the luminaires intended for the above mentioned purpose at this
time or future use.

6.7.10 Provide the Owner with two sets of manufacturer’s installation drawings with Bill of
Materials on drawings and separate instruction manuals for the wiring system.

6.7.11 Secure all manufactured wiring systems to building structural steel purlins (a
maximum of six feet) with suitable clamps to eliminate sagging. Provide additional
clamps and cable strain relief at “tee” connectors to prevent disconnecting of
fittings due to vibration.

6.7.12 Submit a complete set of drawings indicating how the wiring system will be
installed to the Purchasing Division. Also, the manufacturer shall provide the
services of a trained factory representative to assist and instruct the electrical
contractor in the proper installation of the components of the system.

6.8 BUS DROP CABLE

6.8.1 General

6.8.1.1 Use of bus drop cable shall require the approval of the PURCHASING DIVISION.

6.8.1.2 Bus drop cable shall be in accordance with NEC Article 368, 400.7, and 400.8.

6.8.1.3 Cable shall consist of tinned, annealed copper conductors with ASTM Class K
stranding. The cable shall be a four conductor, 600 volt cable. The grounding
conductor shall be color coded green.

6.8.2 Bus Drop Cable Support

6.8.2.1 The basic method of extending cable from the busway to the equipment shall
consist of a strain relief device at the bus plug or fitting on the equipment and
saddles in the horizontal run. At the point where the cable drops vertically from the
horizontal run, it shall be supported by a suitable tension take-up supporting device
which is secured to the building steel or permanent structure.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 69 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

6.8.2.2 The fastening of the supporting device to the building of structure shall be as
specified in Section 9, Fasteners and Supports.

6.8.2.3 Cable drop installations shall have excess cable length formed into a storage loop
at the top of the vertical drop as directed by the Purchasing Division.

6.9 EXPOSED RUN TRAY CABLE AND CABLE TRAY SYSTEM

6.9.1 Use of exposed run tray cable shall require the approval of the PURCHASING
DIVISION.

6.9.2 Exposed run tray cable (Type TC-ER) shall comply with all applicable articles or
sections of the national electrical code and standards of ANSI, UL, CSA, ANCE,
and NEMA, which include NEC Articles 336, 400.7, and 400.8, UL 1277, 1685, and
44.

6.9.3 Cable shall consist of tinned, annealed copper conductors and comply with ICEA
and ASTM. The cable shall be a round four conductor, 600 volt cable. The
grounding conductor shall be color coded green.

6.9.4 Raceway and cable tray are not considered an acceptable equipment grounding
conductor. A separate stranded copper equipment grounding conductor sized in
accordance with NEC Article 250 shall be provided.

6.9.5 Cable installation shall be in accordance with Section 5, Medium Voltage Wiring.

6.9.6 Cables shall be installed on a ladder type cable tray and this installation shall
comply with the requirements of Section 4, Raceway and Cable Tray Systems
and specifically Section 4.6.2, Cable Tray (Low Voltage). Warning signs are not
required for low voltage cables.

6.9.7 Terminate cables at the bus plug and equipment with a cable strain relief device
and an approved liquid tight sealing hub to maintain NEMA 12 integrity of the
equipment enclosure. Terminate cable ground conductors on the bus plug and
equipment ground bus.

6.9.8 Termination installation shall be in accordance with the cable manufacturer’s


requirements and as defined in the contract specifications.

6.9.9 The use of splices shall not be permitted.

6.10 INTERLOCKED ARMORED CABLE AND CABLE TRAY SYSTEM

6.10.1 Interlocked armored cable shall be as specified in GM 11E, 600 Volt Interlock
Armor Cable.

6.10.2 Cable installation shall be in accordance with Section 5, Medium Voltage Wiring.

6.10.3 Cables shall be installed on a ladder type cable tray and this installation shall
comply with the requirements of Section 4, Raceway and Cable Tray Systems

Template Revised 5-06 Page 70 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

and specifically Section 4.6.2, Cable Tray (Low Voltage). Warning signs are not
required for low voltage cables.

6.10.4 Terminate all armored cables at equipment with an approved type of armored
cable terminator and terminate cable ground conductors on equipment ground bus.

6.10.5 Splices and terminations installation shall be in accordance with the cable
manufacturer’s requirements and as defined in the contract specifications.

6.10.6 The use of splices shall require the approval of the PURCHASING DIVISION.

6.10.7 The cable armor and cable ground conductors shall be bonded together such that
they are electrically continuous through the splice.

6.10.8 Mechanical protection for splices in armored cable shall be equivalent to the cable
armor that was removed.

6.10.9 Splices shall be tested in accordance with Section 12, Inspections and Field
Acceptance Test.

6.11 VOLTAGE DROP

6.11.1 Conductors for feeder and branch circuits shall be sized to limit the voltage drop to
5 percent to the farthest outlet of power, heating, and lighting loads, or
combinations of such loads. Voltage drop in the feeder circuit shall not exceed 2
percent and voltage drop in the branch circuit shall not exceed 3 percent. Refer to
Tables 6-1 through 6-4 for minimum lighting branch circuit wire sizes based on a
3 percent voltage drop in the branch circuit.

6.12 TERMINATIONS, PHASING AND IDENTIFICATION

6.12.1 Wire and cable terminations shall be made with UL listed one piece, compression
deforming type, solderless high conductivity copper or copper alloy terminal lugs as
listed below and with tools and materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s
requirements.

1. Terminal lugs shall have hole sizes and spacing in accordance with NEMA
Standards.
2. Terminal lugs shall be attached to wire and cable in accordance with the
manufacturer’s requirements and utilizing the proper tools
3. Terminal lugs for use on wire sizes number 3/0 and smaller shall be single
hole, single compression type.
Exception: Wire and cable No. 6 AWG and smaller may be terminated on
mechanical type connections or terminal strips integral with the utilization
equipment or device. The mechanical connector and terminal strip shall be
UL listed copper, either the tubular type with a pressure plate or the screw
type with a wire clamp. In neither case shall the screw directly compress the
conductors.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 71 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4. Terminal lugs for use on wire sizes number 4/0 and larger shall be of the two
hole, long barrel, double compression type.

6.12.2 Proper phase arrangement shall be maintained on all electrical equipment


throughout the installation. The phasing for power wiring to equipment shall be
A-B-C-N left to right, top to bottom and front to back.

6.12.3 Identify individual conductors as to phase and system voltage by means of color
coding in all outlet or junction boxes and at each splice and termination. The
unique color scheme for each different voltage system shall conform to local codes
and match existing schemes as specified by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

6.13 SPLICES AND TAPS

6.13.1 General

6.13.1.1 There shall be no splices from the power source to the load without Purchasing
Division approval.

6.13.1.2 Splices and taps shall be made with solderless, copper compression deforming
type connectors, and shall bear the UL label on the part or delivery carton.

6.13.1.3 Splices and taps shall be made with approved tools and materials, and in
accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. The joints shall be tight and
secure. No splice shall be made with conductor ends from which strands are
missing or which are mutilated.

6.13.1.4 Where multiple circuits (parallel conductors) are tapped, each phase shall be
connected to the corresponding phase utilizing the appropriate terminal connectors
and all terminals shall be grouped together at the same location.

6.13.2 Connectors

6.13.2.1 Splices and taps on wire sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller shall utilize a solid barrel
crimped connector.

Exception: Wire nuts shall only be used for the following applications:

1. Fluorescent ballast connections.


2. Switches which only have wiring pigtails and no wire terminals.
3. 120 VAC receptacle outlet boxes for circuits sizes 30 amperes and smaller
requiring No. 10 AWG wiring and smaller.

6.13.2.2 Splices and taps on wire sizes No. 6 AWG and larger shall utilize a solid barrel
compression connector or by bolting solid barrel terminal lugs together.

6.13.2.3 Electrical connections to motors, solenoids, and similar devices with integral leads,
size No. 4 AWG and smaller, as well as all current transformers, shall be made
with ring-type copper pressure connectors. The connectors shall be bolted together

Template Revised 5-06 Page 72 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

and taped with oil-resistant electrical tape. Soldered or insulation piercing type
connectors shall not be used. Connections shall not be made inside conduit fittings.

6.13.2.4 Insulation-piercing connectors shall not be used.

6.13.3 Insulation

6.13.3.1 Splices and taps on wire sizes No. 8 AWG and smaller shall be insulated by one of
the following methods:

1. Half-lapped layers of all weather PVC tape (9 mils thick) installed to a


thickness equivalent to the conductor insulation.
2. Heat shrink or cold shrink insulation specifically designed and properly sized
for the application.
3. Insulating caps utilized with the manufacturer-supplied 2-piece connector
specifically designed for the purpose as specified in Section 6.10.2.

6.13.3.2 Splices and taps on wire sizes No. 6 AWG and larger, shall be insulated by one of
the following methods:

1. 3 half-lapped layers of bias-cut, yellow, varnished cambric tape and 3 overall


half-lapped layers of all weather PVC tape (9 mils thick). Electrical insulation
putty may be used over irregular shapes prior to application of the varnished
cambric tape. The putty shall be compatible with the bus and cable insulation
system.
2. Heat shrink or cold shrink insulation specifically designed and properly sized
for the application.

6.13.3.3 Motor terminations shall be insulated by one of the following methods:

1. 3 half-lapped layers or bias-cut, yellow, varnished cambric tape and 3 overall


half-lapped layers of all weather PVC tape (9 mils thick). Electrical insulation
putty may be used and over irregular shapes prior to application of the
varnished cambric tape. The putty shall be compatible with the bus and cable
insulation system.
2. Special motor termination insulating kits specifically designed and properly
sized for the purpose. The insulation shall be either mechanically locked on
the connection or of the heat shrinkable type.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 73 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Table 6-1
Minimum Wire Size for Lighting Branch Circuit Wiring
120 Volt, Single Phase, Branch Circuits
Panel to No. Wire Size (AWG) for Circuit Wattages
Nearest
Outlet
1000 W. 1200 W. 1400 W. 1600 W. 1800 W.
(in feet)
30 12 12 12 12 12
40 12 12 12 12 12
50 12 12 12 12 12
60 12 12 12 12 12
70 12 12 12 12 12
80 12 12 12 10 10
90 12 12 12 10 10
100 12 12 10 10 10
110 12 10 10 10 10
120 12 10 10 10 8

NOTE: The wire sizes shown are based on 3 current carrying conductors in one conduit. For installations
where more than 3 such wires are permitted, the watts shown in the above table shall be multiplied by the de-
rating factor in the NEC for the number of current carrying conductors.

Table 6-2

MINIMUM WIRE SIZE FOR LIGHTING BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING


208 Volt, Three Phase, Four Wire, Grounded Wye Branch Circuit
Panel to
Nearest No. Wire Size (AWG) for Circuit Wattages*
Outlet
(In feet) 1000W 2000W 3000W 4000W 5000W 6000W 7000W 8000W 9000W 10000W
45 12 12 12 12 12 10 10 10 8 8
50 12 12 12 12 12 10 10 10 8 8
60 12 12 12 12 12 10 10 10 8 8
75 12 12 12 12 12 10 10 10 8 8
100 12 12 12 12 10 10 10 8 8 8
150 12 12 12 10 10 8 8 8 6 6
200 12 12 10 8 8 8 6 6 6
250 12 10 10 8 6 6 6 6
300 12 10 8 6 6 6
400 12 8 8
500 10 8 6
*This chart may be used only if load is equally distributed on all phases, and 3 pole breakers and/or 3 pole
switches are utilized to feed the 3-phase circuit.
Note: The wire sizes shown are based on 3 current carrying conductors in one conduit. For
installation which more than 3 such wires are permitted, the watts shown in the above table shall
be multiplied by the de-rating factor in the NEC for the number of current carrying conductors.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 74 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Table 6-3
MINIMUM WIRE SIZE FOR LIGHTING BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING
480 Volts, Three Phase, Three Wire, Grounded Wye* Branch Circuits
Panel to
Nearest No. Wire Size (AWG) for Circuit Wattages*
Outlet
(In feet) 5000W 7500W 10000W 12500W 1500W 17500W 20000W

100 12 12 12 12 10 10 8
150 12 12 12 12 10 10 8
200 12 12 12 12 10 10 8
250 12 12 12 10 10 8 8
300 12 12 10 10 8 8 8
400 12 10 10 8 8 6 6
500 12 10 8 8 6 6 6

* This chart may also be used for 480 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, grounded Wye.
** In both 3 wire and 4-wire system, this chart may be used only if load is equally distributed on
all phases, and 3 pole breakers and/or 3 pole switches are utilized to feed the 3 phase circuits.

NOTE: The wire sizes shown are based on 3 current carrying conductors in one conduit. For
installation where more than 3 such wires are permitted, the watts shown in the above table shall
be multiplied by the de-rating factor in the NEC for the number of current carrying conductors.

Table 6-4

MINIMUM WIRE SIZE FOR LIGHTING BRANCH CIRCUIT WIRING


277 Volt, Single Phase, Branch Circuits

Panel to
Nearest No. Wire Size (AWG) for Circuit Wattages*
Outlet
(In feet) 2800W 3000W 3200W 3400W 3600W 3800W 4000W 4200W 4400W

150 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
160 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 10
170 12 12 12 12 12 12 10 10 10
180 12 12 12 12 12 10 10 10 10
190 12 12 12 12 10 10 10 10 10
200 12 12 12 10 10 10 10 10 10
210 12 12 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
220 12 12 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
230 12 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
240 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
250 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 8

NOTE: The wire sizes shown as based on 3 current carrying conductors in one conduit. For installations
where more than 3 such wires are permitted, the wattages shown in the above table shall be multiplied by the
de-rating factor in the NEC for the number of current carrying conductor.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 75 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

7. FUSES

7.1 GENERAL

7.1.1 Fuses shall comply with all applicable articles and sections of the National
Electrical Code (NEC), Canadian Electrical Code (CEC), Mexican Electrical Code
(MEC) and standards of NEMA, UL, CSA, and ANCE, which include NEC Article
100 and 110, NEMA FU-1, and UL 248.

7.1.2 Fuse installations shall comply with applicable provisions of the NEC, CEC, or
MEC and any additional requirements stated in this standard.

7.1.3 All fuses shall be selected and applied with proper consideration of the inrush and
normal operating current of the load, thermal capability, short circuit withstand
ability of the series connected devices, and any equipment being protected by the
fuse.

7.1.4 Fuses shall be designed and constructed to allow for insertion into fuse clips,
without the use of any adapter devices or other auxiliary hardware.

7.1.5 Two or more fuses applied in series shall be selected with the proper time current
and let-through energy characteristics, in order to provide selective coordination of
the system under all fault conditions, wherever practical.

7.1.6 The installer shall furnish and install fuses for all fusible equipment unless
otherwise specified in the contract documents or by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

7.1.7 The installer shall replace at his expense all fuses lost, blown, damaged or
destroyed during the progress of the work. All fusible equipment shall be correctly
fused at the completion of the contract.

7.2 MEDIUM VOLTAGE FUSES (601 VOLTS TO 35,000 VOLTS)

7.2.1 Medium voltage fuses 15 KV and below shall be the current-limiting type.

7.2.2 All medium voltage fuses (except potential transformer fuses rated 5 amperes and
less) shall have blown fuse indicators.

7.2.3 Medium voltage fuses shall have a symmetrical interrupting rating equal to or
greater than the maximum symmetrical fault current available at the point of fuse
application.

7.2.4 Fuses for power transformer primary protection shall have a continuous rating of at
least 150 percent of the transformer full-load (self-cooled) rating to permit
transformer short time overloads.

7.2.5 Medium voltage fuses shall be capable of carrying at least twelve times the full-
load rated primary current of the power transformer for one-tenth of a second to
safely carry the inrush currents, which occur during switching operations.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 76 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

7.2.6 The voltage rating for any fuse shall be the rating nearest to, but never less than,
the line-to-line voltage of the circuit.

7.2.7 Where current-limiting fuses cannot meet voltage or current requirements for
exposed outdoor applications, expulsion type fuses may be used. Where expulsion
type fuses are necessary for use in enclosures, they shall be equipped with
mufflers to absorb noise and energy from expelled gases.

7.3 LOW VOLTAGE FUSES (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)

7.3.1 General

7.3.1.1 All fuses shall have a minimum interrupting rating of 120 percent of the maximum
available system short circuit current. In no case shall the interrupting rating be
less than 100,000 amperes rms symmetrical.

Exception: The interrupting capacity requirement need not apply to circuits on the
secondary of control transformers.

7.3.1.2 All low voltage fuses shall provide high interrupting capacity (current limiting) and
be UL tested, listed and labeled Class J, Class L, Class RK1, Class RK5, or Class
CC as required by the application.

7.3.1.3 These types of fuses shall be applied to limit the maximum peak fault current and
the let through energy to less than the withstand and interrupting ratings of the
lowest rated downstream device.

7.3.1.4 Fuse clips shall be the rejection type.

7.3.1.5 Class H and other fuses with lower than 100,000 ampere interrupting capacity shall
not be used.

7.3.2 Fuse Applications

7.3.2.1 In general, fuse types shall be provided as indicated in Table 7-1 Fuse
Applications (600 Volts and below).

7.3.2.2 Table 7-1 Fuse Applications is included as a guideline for fuse specifications, but in
all cases fuses shall be applied based on the special conditions associated with
each application.

7.3.2.3 Fuses applied for the protection of capacitor banks shall be rated not less than 165
percent of the capacitor bank’s full load current rating.

7.3.2.4 Fuse protection for control circuits 250 volts and below shall be Class CC.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 77 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Table 7-1

Fuse Applications (600-Volts and Below)

Items to be Protected Fuse Location UL Fuse Designation

Feeder or branch circuits Disconnect switch, bus plug, Class RK-5


below 400 Amperes power panel, or motor controllers

Feeder or branch circuits 400 Disconnect switch, bus plug, Class RK-1
Amperes to 600 Amperes power panel, or motor controllers

Feeder or branch circuits 601 Disconnect switch, bus plug, Class L


Amperes and above power panel, or motor controllers

*Busway, feeders, motors, etc. Integral molded case fuse and *See note below.
breaker arrangement

*Lighting or receptacle panels Disconnect switch, bus plug, *See note below.
and mini-load centers power panel, or motor controllers

*Circuit breakers Bus plug or fusible panelboard *See note below.

Capacitor banks Disconnect switch, bus plug, Provide fuses rated in


power panel, or motor controllers accordance with the capacitor
bank manufacturer’s
recommendations.

AC Resistance Welders Bus plug Class J welder limiters or


Class RK-1 or RK-5 as
determined by Purchasing
Division.

Control transformers 5 KVA Transformer primary Class CC


and below

*NOTE: Where a fuse is used in series with a circuit breaker rated less than the available fault
current, the series combination shall be tested by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and
the combination shall be so labeled per NEC Article 240.86 or CEC 14-014.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 78 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

8. GROUNDING

8.1 DEFINITIONS

8.1.1 General

8.1.1.1 The considerations of grounding that are involved in an industrial power distribution
system may be subdivided into categories:

1. System grounding
2. Equipment grounding
3. Static grounding
4. Lightning protection grounding
5. Connection to earth – basic ground
Refer to Figure 8-1, Substation Grounding Methods

8.1.2 System Grounding

8.1.2.1 System grounding is an intentional grounding of one conductor of the system to


limit the maximum potential value to ground due to normal operating voltage and to
limit the voltage level on the system due to lightning, line surges, unintentional
contact with higher voltage lines or other abnormal conditions. The neutral point of
the transformer or generator is usually the point connected to ground.

8.1.2.2 In addition to the control of system over voltages, intentional electrical system
neutral grounding makes possible sensitive and rapid fault protection based on
detection of ground current flow. Solidly grounded systems are arranged so that
circuit protective devices will remove faulty circuits from the system regardless of
the type of fault. Any contact from phase to ground in the grounded system should
result in immediate isolation of the faulted circuit and its loads.

8.1.3 Equipment Grounding

8.1.3.1 Equipment grounding is intended to prevent an objectionable potential above


ground on conductor and equipment enclosures and to provide a low-impedance
path for fault-currents by connecting the equipment grounding conductor to the
grounded conductor if it is a grounded system. This is achieved by providing a
permanent and continuous bonding together of conductor enclosures, equipment
frames, switchgear, cable armor, conduit, cable tray, portable electric equipment,
steel structures, and other non-current-carrying metal parts of the system to form a
low-impedance path to ground.

8.1.4 Static Grounding

8.1.4.1 Static grounding is the means by which static electricity is provided a path to
ground to prevent the buildup of static charge.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 79 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

8.1.5 Lightning Protection Grounding

8.1.5.1 Lightning protection systems consist of three basic parts which provide a low
impedance metal path required for lightning discharge to ground:

1. A system of lightning rods (air terminals) on the roof and other elevated
locations.
2. A system of ground rods.
3. A conductor system connecting the lightning rods to the grounds rods.

8.1.5.2 These basic components are intended to assure that the lightning discharge will be
conducted harmlessly between the lightning rods and the ground rods.

8.1.5.3 Lightning protection grounding and static grounding shall be separate and
independent. That is, no bond or common connection shall exist between lightning
protection grounding and the other grounding installations except the basic ground
to which it is connected.

8.1.6 Basic Ground

8.2.1.1 Basic ground shall be interpreted as the earth or other essential grounding
elements (e.g., structural metal frame of the building, concrete encased electrodes,
ground mats, ground rods, etc.).

8.2.1.2 It is the intent of this standard to require that all basic grounds have a low
resistance of 5 ohms or less. Testing of basic grounds and testing values shall be
in accordance with Section 12, Inspections and Field Acceptance Tests. In
cases where this required resistance value necessitates construction, which is
more extensive than that called for under this standard or by the contract
specifications, the installer shall notify the Purchasing Division before proceeding
further with the work.

8.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

8.2.1 All grounding shall comply with applicable NEC Article 250, CEC Section 10, or
MEC and any additional requirements as stated in this standard. Static grounding
shall comply with NFPA-77. Lightning protection grounding shall comply with
NFPA-78.

8.2.1.1 The grounding system shall include the provision, installation, and connection of
ground rods, ground cables, ground buses, conduit, fittings, anchors, supports,
exothermic weld process materials and equipment, and other materials as required
for a complete installation. Also included is the extension of the grounding system
to equipment and/or rooms from existing ground mats, where applicable. Refer to
Figure 8-1, Substation Grounding Methods.

8.2.1.2 All grounding cables, bus, etc., in locations subject to mechanical damage, shall be
protected by galvanized rigid metal conduit, steel guards, or other suitable shields.
In all cases, where conduit or other metallic enclosure of grounding conductors is

Template Revised 5-06 Page 80 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

required, the conductor shall be permanently and effectively grounded to the


conduit or enclosure at both ends of its length, using approved fittings for that
application.

8.2.1.3 Cables shall be installed with enough slack to prevent breaking stresses.

8.2.1.4 No soldered connections shall be used on grounding circuits at any point, except
where grounding conductors are attached to lead cable sheaths or shielding tapes.

8.2.1.5 All compression connectors, lugs, etc., used in grounding circuits in any location
shall be UL approved and have bolts, nuts, etc., of silicon bronze alloy, stainless
steel, or zinc plated steel and installed with the proper power operated
compression tool.

8.2.1.6 Grounding conductors that pass through floor slabs, building walls, etc., shall be
installed in a rigid PVC conduit sleeve, or other approved non-metallic material.

8.2.1.7 Underground grounding conductors shall be buried at least 24 inches below grade.

8.2.1.8 Bare copper bar, cables or fittings used for grounding shall not be installed in
cinder fill or covered with soil containing cinders or other corrosive materials.

8.2.1.9 Sprinkler mains shall not be used for grounding.

Note: Special precautions shall be taken where cathodic protection is used.

8.2.1 Grounds Rods

8.2.1.1 Ground rods shall be solid, cylindrical, ¾ inch diameter and15 foot minimum
installed length, as required to reach specified resistance. Rods shall be of solid
copper or copper clad steel.

8.2.1.2 Grounding electrode conductors shall be attached to ground rods by the


exothermic welding process.

8.2.1.3 Locate a minimum of 1-rod length from each other and at least the same distance
from any other grounding electrode.

8.2.1.4 Drive ground rods until tops are 24 inches below finished floor or final grade unless
otherwise specified.

8.2.1.5 Interconnect ground rods with grounding-electrode conductors. Make these


connections without damaging copper coating or exposing steel.

8.2.2 Concrete-Encased Electrodes (Ufer Ground)

8.2.2.1 Concrete-encased electrodes shall use a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper


conductor not smaller than 4/0 AWG. Route the copper conductor on the outside
of the steel cage and keep taut between connections. Provide a compression

Template Revised 5-06 Page 81 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

connection at the top of the cage and before each direction change to accumulate
20 feet minimum of bonded conductor.

8.2.2.2 Reinforcing rod to be used as ground rod in the foundation shall have a minimum
diameter of ½ inch.

8.2.2.3 Bond the copper conductor to the reinforcing rod in at least 4 locations using
compression fittings.

8.2.2.4 Anchor bolt nuts shall be welded to the anchor bolts and the column base plate.

8.2.2.5 The base of the foundation shall touch the soil, rock, fill, etc. The use of
polyethylene or similar material that prevents this from being accomplished shall be
prohibited.

8.2.3 Bonding Jumpers

8.2.3.1 Bonding jumpers shall be copper and of a cross-sectional area at least equal to
their corresponding grounding conductors. Where attached to equipment, conduits,
cabinets, etc., suitable approved solderless lugs, compression deforming
connectors or grounding clamps shall be used.

8.2.3.2 Lead sheaths and shielding tapes of cables shall be bonded to the ground bus.

8.2.3.3 Grounding conductors shall be bonded to building steel and shall be connected at
points where they will not be subject to mechanical damage.

8.2.3.4 Where possible, bonding jumpers shall be accessible for inspection and
connections to building steel shall be made by the exothermic welding process.
Where the grounding conductor is bolted to the steel with a compression deforming
connector, the connection shall be made in such a manner that an effective ground
path is maintained.

8.2.4 Taps

8.2.4.1 Taps to grounding electrode conductors and equipment room ground buses shall
be made by the exothermic welding process.

Exception: Foundation reinforcing rod connections to the grounding electrode


conductor in concrete-encased electrodes may be made with UL approved
compression deforming ground connectors, installed with the proper compression
tool.

8.2.5 Building Frame Grounding

8.2.5.1 The structural steel frame of the building shall be part of the grounding electrode
system and shall be effectively grounded by the use of ground rods or concrete-
encased electrodes. Ground rods or electrodes shall be provided at every other
building column (approximately 100 to 120 feet on centers), in a staggered
arrangement. All grounding electrode conductors shall be No. 4/0 AWG minimum

Template Revised 5-06 Page 82 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

bare stranded copper wire. Grounding electrodes for unit substation rooms, lighting
transformers, etc., which have No. 4/0 or larger grounding electrode conductors
may be used to meet the building frame ground requirements.

8.3 SYSTEM GROUNDING

8.3.1 The neutral terminal of all transformers shall be effectively grounded and bonded to
the transformer enclosure. In addition, the enclosure shall be bonded to the
nearest building steel. The grounding electrode conductor connected to building
steel shall be sized in accordance with NEC Article 250, CEC Section 10 or MEC.
Splices in wire or cable ground conductors shall not be permitted.

8.4 OBJECTIONABLE CURRENTS

8.4.1 Grounding conductors are not intended to carry current other than temporary
currents that may be set up under accidental conditions. They are installed for and
are intended to carry current to perform some safety function. Any current over a
grounding electrode conductor that would prevent it from maintaining the
equipment at the earth potential would be objectionable. Since every conductor
has resistance, current flow through the conductor will produce a voltage drop
across it. Any voltage drop on a grounding conductor that would create a shock
hazard certainly would not be acceptable. Electrical systems shall be installed in a
manner that will prevent objectionable current. Refer to NEC Article 250-6 and the
example in Figure 8-2, Panelboard Neutral Grounding Method.

8.5 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

8.5.1 General

8.5.1.1 The intent of equipment grounding is to minimize voltage differences between the
metal equipment enclosures and surrounding areas. Care shall be exercised in all
cases to see that this requirement is met.

8.5.2 Outdoor Switchgear and Loadcenter Substations

8.5.2.1 Each outdoor switchgear and loadcenter substation shall be provided with a
suitable ground grid to form a mat covering the entire area of the switchgear or
substation. This mat shall consist of a continuous stranded bare copper cable
connected to driven ground rods. The size of ground conductors shall be
determined by the maximum available fault current but shall not be less than No.
4/0 AWG.

8.5.2.2 All outdoor switches or bus structures, cable sheaths, potheads, equipment frames,
conduits, etc., and building steel, shall be effectively grounded to the mat.

8.5.2.3 Steel fence enclosures, etc., surrounding an outdoor substation shall be grounded.
A grounding conductor of a minimum No. 4/0 AWG stranded bare copper wire shall
be installed around the fence approximately 12 inches below grade and 12 to 24
inches from the fence. The wire shall be connected to ground rods installed at each
corner and at intervals of approximately 20 feet around the fence. The fence posts

Template Revised 5-06 Page 83 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

and fence shall be connected to the grounding wire at each ground rod. Care shall
be taken to obtain a good connection to the fence strands at these points. All gates
shall be bonded to the fence with flexible braided copper jumpers having cross
sectional area equal to the grounding conductors. When the fence is separated
from the station equipment or structure, the fence shall be bonded to the building
site, unless another method is required by the utility company. The substation
grounding method shall be verified with the utility company.

8.5.3 Indoor Switchgear and Loadcenter Substations

8.5.3.1 Each indoor switchgear and loadcenter substation room shall be provided with a
suitable ground grid to form a mat covering the entire area beneath the switchgear
or substation room. This mat shall consist of a continuous stranded bare copper
cable connected to driven ground rods. The size of ground conductors shall be
determined by the magnitude of the maximum available fault currents but shall not
be less than No. 4/0 AWG.

8.5.3.2 For indoor switchgear and loadcenter substations, all equipment structures,
potheads, cable sheaths, cable trays, feeder conduits, equipment frames,
instrument transformer secondaries, etc., in transformer and switch rooms shall be
effectively grounded to the mat.

8.5.3.3 A continuous rectangular copper bus of the size specified in the contract
documents shall be provided. The copper bus shall be installed exposed on the
walls or as specified in the contract documents. The minimum size of this
substation room perimeter ground bus shall be ¼ inch by 2 inches.

8.5.3.4 Electrical room grounding bus shall be spaced 1/2 inch from wall and supported
from wall 7 feet-6 inches above finished floor unless otherwise specified.

8.5.3.5 The main ground bus shall be run up the wall on both sides of door frames and
cross above the door to form a complete, unbroken ring circuit. The door and door
frame shall be bonded to this ground bus.

8.5.3.6 Where the total length of the main grounding bus exceeds 100 feet, and for each
100 additional feet or part thereof, an additional grounding electrode conductor
shall be provided, evenly spaced. These grounding electrode conductors shall be
at least No. 4/0 AWG bare stranded copper wire in continuous unspliced lengths.
Where they extend outside of the room, they shall be enclosed in 1 inch galvanized
rigid steel conduit for mechanical protection.

8.5.3.7 At least two (2) grounding electrode conductors shall be provided to bond the main
grounding bus to building steel.

8.5.3.8 Each primary switchgear lineup, substation incoming line section, transformer
section and secondary switchgear section shall be connected to the main
grounding bus. Refer to Section 2.4.1 item 6 for requirements.

8.5.3.9 These connections to the main grounding bus shall have a minimum size of ¼ inch
by 1 inch copper bar or minimum 4/0 AWG stranded copper wire.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 84 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

8.5.3.10 The grounding electrode conductor shall be securely bonded to its enclosing
conduit, with a grounding hub at each end.

8.5.4 Underground System

8.5.4.1 A continuous bare copper ground bus with a minimum size of ¼ inch by 1-¼ inch
shall be installed around the entire length of the walls in each manhole or handhole
at a level just below cable entrances. This bus shall form a complete unbroken ring
circuit. It shall be rigidly and securely fastened to the walls and connected to
ground rods (in diagonally opposite corners of the manhole or vault) using a No.
4/0 AWG minimum bare copper ground conductor.

8.5.4.2 Connect exposed manhole or handhole metal parts, such as inserts, cable racks,
pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to
ground bus. Make connections with minimum No. 2 AWG stranded, hard-drawn
copper wire. Train conductors plumb or level around corners and fasten to
manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields as recommended by
manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

8.5.4.3 Where a cable vault is located adjacent to or within 50 feet of a switch room or
transformer station and connected to the same distribution system, the equipment
grounding bus in the switch room or transformers station shall be connected to the
cable vault grounding bus by two No. 4/0 AWG or lamer copper conductors.

8.5.4.4 A grounding conductor shall be installed in each concrete duct envelope between
manholes and/or cable vaults and bonded to the ground bus in each manhole or
vault. The size of grounding conductor shall be determined by maximum available
fault current but shall, in no case, be smaller than No. 4/0 AWG.

8.5.5 Medium Voltage Utilization Equipment

8.5.5.1 Medium voltage utilization equipment such as motors, starters, furnaces,


capacitors, etc., shall have a continuous grounding conductor from the ground bus
at the source to the enclosure of the utilization equipment. In addition, the
enclosure of the utilization equipment shall be bonded to the nearest building steel
with a minimum No. 1/0 AWG bare stranded, copper cable.

8.5.5.2 The grounding conductor for individual pieces of equipment shall be stranded bare
copper cable or flat copper bus bar sized to carry the maximum available ground
fault current, but shall not be less than No. 1/0 AWG or ¼ inch by 1 inch bar.
Where cable is used it shall be continuous without splices.

8.5.6 Low Voltage Utilization Equipment

8.5.6.1 All metal enclosures, raceway, cable tray, ducts, busway enclosures, motor frames,
steel supports for starters, panels, switches, etc., shall be effectively grounded.
Special consideration shall be given to equipment not rigidly secured to, and in
contact with the grounded structural metal frame of a building, or conduit system,
or which is subject to excessive vibration and loosening of ground connections.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 85 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

8.5.6.2 Raceway and cable tray are not considered an acceptable equipment grounding
conductor. A separate stranded copper equipment grounding conductor sized in
accordance with NEC Article 250, CEC Section 10 or MEC shall be provided.

8.5.6.3 Where conduits or cable trays are not terminated at an enclosure, they shall be
grounded with approved bonding jumpers from the conduit grounding bushing or
cable tray to a stud or corrosion resistant alloy bolt in the cabinet frame.

8.5.6.4 Conduits which run to enclosures having concentric or eccentric knockouts which
partially perforate the metal around the conduit and impair the electrical connection
to ground shall be provided with approved bonding jumpers.

8.5.6.5 Jumpers shall consist of a stranded or braided copper wire sized in accordance
with NEC Article 250, CEC Section 10, and MEC. The bonding jumper shall be
connected from the grounding bushing on the conduit to a ground bus stud or
corrosion resistant alloy bolt in the enclosure.

8.5.6.6 Conduit expansion joints and telescoping sections of metal raceways not
thoroughly bonded otherwise shall be provided with approved bonding jumpers of
not less than No. 8 AWG stranded bare copper.

8.5.6.7 Where liquid tight flexible conduit is used, an additional stranded copper-grounding
conductor shall be installed as a grounding connection. The conductor shall be
sized in accordance with NEC Article 250, CEC Section 10, and MEC, but shall not
be less than No. 12 AWG.

8.5.7 Elpo Dip Tank System Grounding

8.5.7.1 The Elpo dip tank system shall be effectively grounded to minimize hazardous
conditions due to external or system faults. The Elpo dip tank system shall be
provided with a suitable ground grid to form a mat covering the area beneath the
Elpo dip tank.

8.5.7.2 The mat shall be constructed of No. 4/0 AWG stranded bare copper cable, buried
to a minimum depth of 24 inches below finished floor unless otherwise specified,
connected to driven ground rods. The ground mat shall have the shape of two
triads joined together. Refer to Figure 8-3, Elpo Ground Mat.

8.5.7.3 The mat shall be placed central to the corresponding long and short dimensions of
the tank outline.

8.5.7.4 The mat shall have a maximum resistance of 2 ohms. Refer to Section 12,
Inspections and Field Acceptance Test for testing requirements.

8.5.7.5 The six grounding conductors that connect the mat to the building columns shall
not extend through the Elpo containment area. Refer to Figure 8-4, Grounding
Conductor Column Connection.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 86 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

8.5.8 Computer and Telecommunications Equipment Room and Plant Floor


Cabinet

8.5.8.1 The computer room, telecommunications equipment room and plant floor
telecommunications cabinet shall be grounded in accordance with NFPA-75,
EIA/TIA 607, GM Gold Build Definition for Grounding and Bonding, NEC Article
645, CEC Section 60-700, MEC, and this standard unless otherwise specified by
the PURCHASING DIVISION.

8.5.8.2 Each computer and telecommunications room shall be provided with a


telecommunications ground bar (TGB). Each plant floor telecommunications
cabinet will be provided with a rack ground bus bar (RGB) by the cabinet
manufacturer.

8.5.8.3 The computer room shall be provided with a copper ground grid covering the entire
area under the raised floor. This grid shall consist of bare stranded copper cable
electrically connected by means of an exothermic welding process or clamped with
approved connectors every 4 feet to form a 4-foot by 4-foot grid. The grid shall be
connected to the pedestals supporting the raised floor. The size of the grid
conductors shall be a minimum No. 2 AWG. The grid shall be connected to the
room TGB with a minimum No. 2/0 AWG green insulated stranded copper bonding
conductor.

8.5.8.4 The computer and telecommunications room TGB and plant floor cabinet RGB
shall be bonded to the nearest substation room ground bus, building column or
horizontal building steel member, where this member is permanently electrically
bonded, by structural welding or by exothermic welded bonding jumpers, to a
building column. The bonding conductor shall be a minimum No. 4/0 AWG bare
stranded copper wire.

8.5.8.5 Each computer and telecommunications room cabinet and rack shall be bonded to
the room TGB with a minimum No. 6 AWG green insulated stranded copper
conductor.

8.5.8.6 All metallic conduit and tray entering, leaving or contained within the computer or
telecommunications room shall be bonded to the under floor ground grid or TGB
with a minimum No. 6 AWG green insulated stranded copper conductor.

8.5.8.7 All electrical panel, modular cooling unit (MCU) and power distribution unit (PDU)
enclosures shall be bonded to the under floor ground grid or TGB with a minimum
No. 6 AWG green insulated stranded conductor.

8.5.9 Grounding of Communication Cables

8.5.9.1 Communication cables shall have the shielding effectively grounded to prevent
electromagnetic interference and to provide maximum shield effectiveness for the
signal. Shielding shall be grounded only at the source end.

8.6 STATIC GROUNDING

Template Revised 5-06 Page 87 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

8.6.1 All grounding in hazardous areas shall comply with NEC Article 500, CEC Section
10, MEC, NFPA-77, the requirements for the insurance underwriter, and any
additional requirements stated in this standard.

8.6.2 Storage rooms utilized for handling hazardous liquids or gases shall have a
continuous ¼ inch by 2 inch rectangular bare copper grounding bus installed
around the perimeter of the walls, approximately 18 inches above finish floor. The
ground bus shall be spaced a minimum of 1 ½ inches from the wall.
8.6.2.1 Where doors entering these rooms are provided with brass or other approved non-
ferrous metal thresholds the ground bus shall be carried down to the threshold on
both sides of each door. The ground bus shall be attached to the threshold by a
welded or brazed flexible jumper, thus making the threshold a part of the ground
bus circuit.
8.6.2.2 Where metal thresholds are not provided, the ground bus circuit shall be run up the
wall on both sides of door frames, and cross above the door to complete the circuit.
The bus shall be rigidly and securely fastened to walls.

8.6.3 All equipment, such as motor frames, agitator mixer frames, static brushes, hoists
and structural frames, shall be securely bonded to the copper grounding bus.

8.6.4 The perimeter ground bus in each room shall be securely and effectively bonded to
the building steel and/or driven ground rods by a minimum of two grounding
electrode conductors installed at diagonally opposite points.

8.6.5 Where conductive floors are installed, they shall be bonded to the building steel or
grounding bus, in accordance with requirements of the conductive floor
manufacturer.

8.6.6 The installer shall provide a portable flexible bonding jumper where equipment or
portable machines are located in hazardous areas.

8.6.7 Paint and thinner lines shall be grounded in accordance with NFPA Standard 77.

8.7 LIGHTNING PROTECTION GROUNDING

8.7.1 Grounding conductors for lightning arresters, lightning rods or static shielding
conductors shall be run as directly as possible (consistent with good construction
practices) to the nearest ground rod or other grounding point. Changes in direction
of such conductors shall be accomplished by long radius bends.

8.7.1.1 Metal raceways, enclosures, frames and other non-current-carrying metal parts of
electrical equipment shall be kept at least 6 feet away from lightning rod
conductors, or they shall be bonded to the lightning rod conductors.

8.7.2 Lightning arrester conductors shall be stranded copper wire, sized in accordance
with NEC, CEC, MEC and NFPA-780.

8.7.3 Bond grounding conductors, including grounding-conductor conduits, to lightning


protection down conductors or lightning protection grounding conductors in
compliance with NFPA 780.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 88 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

8.7.4 Bond electric power system ground directly to lightning protection system
grounding conductor at closest point to electric service grounding electrode. Use
bonding conductor sized same as system grounding conductor and install in
conduit.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 89 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Substation Grounding Methods


Figure 8-1

Template Revised 5-06 Page 90 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Transformer
Objectionable
current on conduit Objectionable
L1 L2 L3 X0 X2 if X0 is bonded to current on
X1 X3
GND in subpanel. building steel if
X0 is bonded to
GND in subpanel.
GND

GND bar bonded to case

Panelboard

Normal return hot


path on neutral neutral
conductor. gnd

X0
X XX X
GND

Objectionable
If Neutral (X0) is connected to case at
GND bar current on case
both the transformer and the
bonded to if X0 is bonded
panelboard, current has multiple paths
case to GND in this
back to the source. Objectionable
panel.
current will flow on electrically
conductive parts (panel, conduit,
fittings, etc.) and the bonding conductor
between the panelboard and the
separately derived source.

Panelboard Neutral Grounding Method


Figure 8-2

Template Revised 5-06 Page 91 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Elpo Ground Mat


Figure 8-3

Template Revised 5-06 Page 92 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Grounding Conductor Column Connection


Figure 8-4

Template Revised 5-06 Page 93 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

9. FASTENERS AND SUPPORTS

9.1 GENERAL

9.1.1 All raceways, cable trays, enclosures, boxes and other electrical materials and
equipment shall be supported in accordance with the requirements of the NEC,
CEC, MEC, this standard and as specified by the Purchasing Division. Refer to
Section 9.7, Details for equipment and material support methods.

9.1.2 The type and size of beam clamps, hanger rods, anchors and toggle bolts shall be
in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and based on the application
and maximum loading specifications.

9.1.3 Spring clips shall not be acceptable. Clamps shall be the two-bolt or J-bolt type.

9.1.4 There shall be no drilling, burning or welding of the building steel, except with
specific approval of the PURCHASING DIVISION.

9.1.5 Stud welding shall require approval of the PURCHASING DIVISION and shall be
performed by experienced workers using automatic stud welders in a manner
recommended by the manufacturer.

9.1.6 Explosive type fastening tools shall not be used without special approval of the
PURCHASING DIVISION.

9.1.7 Equipment supported from building steel shall be supported from beams rather
than trusses wherever possible. Where support from a truss is required, review the
installation with the Purchasing Division’s structural engineer. Attachment to
trusses shall be at or near the truss panel point.

9.2 BEAM CLAMPS AND CONDUIT HANGERS

9.2.1 Beam clamps shall be of the J-Bolt or restraining strap type, which clamp firmly into
both flanges of a beam. The clamp shall have a bolt or strap that is factory-formed
in the shape of the letter J to grip the beam. The beam clamp shall be properly
sized for the beam. The minimum loading rating shall be 500 pounds with a safety
factor of 5. The clamp shall be designed to accept the size hanger rod required. All
nuts shall have lock washers and shall be properly tightened with a wrench.

9.2.2 Conduit hangers shall be bolted to beam clamps where structural steel beams are
available.

9.2.3 Where conduit is supported from concrete slabs it shall be secured with an anchor
and lay-in type conduit hanger with positive bolt closure.

9.2.4 Equipment supports which are to be secured to building steel shall be attached
with beam clamps, round steel hanger rod, or channel supports of the proper size
and type. The method of support shall be as specified in this standard or as
specified in the contract documents.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 94 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

9.2.5 Equipment suspended from building steel shall be supported by round steel rods
securely fastened to the structure utilizing a clamping method specified in this
standard or as specified in the contract documents.

9.2.6 The minimum diameter of round steel rod permissible for hangers and supports
shall be 3/8 inch (minimum shall be ½ inch for busway and cable tray).

9.2.7 Provide self-colored oil-finished type threaded steel rod for indoor use, and hot-
dipped galvanized threaded steel rod for outdoor use.

9.3 ANCHORS

9.3.1 Conduit, material and equipment supported from or attached to concrete or


masonry surfaces shall be attached using steel wedge type anchors of the proper
size and load rating. The installation shall comply with manufacturer’s instructions
and shall not exceed the maximum load rating of the anchor. Do not use metal roof
decking and cellular floors for supporting equipment. Lead products will not be
allowed.

9.4 TOGGLE BOLTS

9.4.1 On hollow tile or similar surfaces, toggle type bolts shall be used to secure
equipment supports.

9.5 MISCELLANEOUS FASTENERS AND SUPPORTS

9.5.1 Where equipment is to be installed inside the web of building columns, it shall be
supported with expandable column inserts and off-set conduits to 1 side of insert to
allow for future additions.

9.5.2 Where concrete, tile, brick or other masonry is found unsuitable for supporting
required loads by means of expansive type screw anchors and when directed by
the Purchasing Division, the installer shall drill holes entirely through the wall or
slab and through-bolts with proper sized plates or washers shall be installed. Bolt
heads and plates shall be countersunk flush with the masonry as required.

9.5.3 The maximum spacing of conduit supports shall be 10 feet.

9.5.4 Conduits grouped on a common steel support shall be secured with properly sized
one-hole, galvanized, malleable iron pipe straps or with galvanized steel clamps
approved by the Purchasing Division.

9.5.5 Cable ties, where specified, shall be U.V. resistant (Black), fungus-inert, self
extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking type made of 6/6 nylon with minimum width of
3/16 inch, 50 lb minimum tensile strength, -40 to 185 deg F minimum temperature
range.

9.6 FINISH OF HARDWARE

Template Revised 5-06 Page 95 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

9.6.1 All steel hardware, including bolts, nuts, washers, turnbuckles and clevises, etc.,
shall be galvanized or zinc plated, except where otherwise specified.

9.7 DETAILS

9.7.1 The following Figures 9-1 through 9-29 illustrate various methods of clamping and
mounting electrical material and equipment to the building structure. The
PURCHASING DIVISION reserves the right to determine which, if any, of these
details may be used for any particular application or project. Where the contract
documents call for other mounting and clamping details, the installation shall
comply with the contract documents. The configuration of the support steel, each
material or equipment support and the size of clamp and hanger devices shall be
based on the load requirements of each application. Under no circumstances shall
a clamp or hanger device be subjected to loads in excess of the manufacturer’s
maximum loading specifications.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 96 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Hanger Rod Connection to Strut Channel


Figure 9 - 1

Conduit Hanger Detail


Figure 9 - 2

Template Revised 5-06 Page 97 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

J-Bolt Clamp Detail


Figure 9 - 3

Beam Clamp and Conduit Hanger Detail


Figure 9 - 4

Template Revised 5-06 Page 98 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Center Beam Clamp Detail


Figure 9 - 5

½” Hanger Rod Connection to Steep Sloped Roof Purlin


Figure 9 - 6

Template Revised 5-06 Page 99 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

3/8” Hanger Rod Connection to Steep Sloped Roof Purlin


Figure 9 - 7

Conduit Connection Perpendicular to Beam


Figure 9 - 8

Template Revised 5-06 Page 100 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Strut U-Bolt Beam Clamp Detail


Figure 9 - 9

Cantilevered Strut Connection Detail


Figure 9 - 10

Template Revised 5-06 Page 101 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Horizontal Cable Tray (Conduit & Busway Trapeze Hanger


Similar) Hanger Detail
Figure 9 - 11

Cable Tray and Hanger Rod Connection to Strut Channel Detail


(Conduit & Busway Detail Similar)
Figure 9 - 12

Template Revised 5-06 Page 102 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Typical Indoor Cable Tray Sway Bracing Detail


Figure 9 - 13

Sway Brace Connection to Truss Vertical


Figure 9 - 14

Template Revised 5-06 Page 103 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Cable Tray and Busway Sway Bracing Connection to Strut


Figure 9 - 15

Cable Tray and Busway Sway Bracing Connection to


Strut Channel Trapeze
Figure 9 - 16

Template Revised 5-06 Page 104 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Busway Hanger Detail


Figure 9 - 17

Busway Sway Brace Detail


Figure 9 - 18

Template Revised 5-06 Page 105 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Busway Wall and Floor Openings Detail


Figure 9 - 19

Template Revised 5-06 Page 106 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Strut Support in Column Web


Figure 9 - 20

Template Revised 5-06 Page 107 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Column Mounted 480 Volt Power Receptacle


Figure 9 - 21

Column Mounted Receptacle Panel Detail


Figure 9 - 22

Template Revised 5-06 Page 108 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Clamping Detail “A”


Figure 9 - 23

Template Revised 5-06 Page 109 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Industrial Fluorescent Luminaire - Steel Strut Channel Support Detail


Figure 9 - 24

Typical Chain Hung Fluorescent Lighting Detail


Figure 9 - 25

Template Revised 5-06 Page 110 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Typical Luminaire Conduit Suspension Detail


Figure 9 - 26

Mounting Detail for Industrial Low Bay


Luminaires From Purlins
Figure 9 - 27

Template Revised 5-06 Page 111 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Luminaire Hanger Support Detail


Figure 9 - 28

Explosion Proof Luminaire Hanger Detail


Figure 9 - 29

Template Revised 5-06 Page 112 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

10. CONSTRUCTION IN HAZARDOUS AREAS

10.1 CONSTRUCTION, INSTALLATION, EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

10.1.1 All installations in hazardous (classified) locations shall be in accordance with the
applicable provisions of the NEC, CEC, MEC, consensus standards and all
national, state and local codes.

10.1.2 Specific interpretation of the type of construction for each installation within
a hazardous area shall be determined through the cooperative effort of the
PURCHASING DIVISION, Purchasing Division’s Architect/Engineer,
Corporate GM Global Security Staff, Local Security Staff, Insurance
Underwriter (GE Global Asset Protection), and the State and Local Code
Authorities.

10.1.3 The classification of each hazardous area shall be consistently designated on all
contract documents.

10.1.4 All equipment shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters’ Laboratories,


Factory Mutual, or other recognized national testing laboratory, for the
hazardous location in which it is installed.

10.1.5 Threaded rigid steel conduit shall be the only acceptable type of conduit in
hazardous locations.

10.1.6 Motor terminals and other equipment (e.g., limit switches, solenoid valves, etc.)
subject to mechanical vibration shall have flexible couplings connections approved
for the application.

10.1.6.1 The minimum recommended bending radius and the length of the flexible
couplings conduit for motor and equipment connections for explosion-proof, dust-
ignition-proof (dust-tight) and watertight flexible couplings shall be as shown in
Table 10-1, Flexible Conduit Minimum Bending Radius.

10.1.7 Explosion-proof fittings and device enclosures shall have threaded covers. Devices
with threaded covers shall be secured tight enough to prevent loosening while in
service. Assembled joints shall have at least five full threads engaged.

10.1.8 Where threaded fittings and device enclosures are not available, explosion-proof
fittings and device enclosures with machined mating surfaces shall be provided,
handled and installed as follows:

1. All ground finish joint surfaces shall be protected against damage. Care shall
be used in replacing covers to avoid damage to machined surfaces.
a. Covers shall not be placed on edge on a hard surface.
b. Covers shall not be laid face down on a rough surface.
c. Covers shall not be stacked.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 113 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

2. All dirt, sealing compound and paint which may have adhered to the mating
surfaces shall be removed.
3. Before the cover is applied, a thin film of new grease or petroleum as
approved by the enclosure manufacturer shall be spread over both surfaces
of each joint.
4. Covers shall be pulled down evenly and tight without overstraining the bolts.
5. Covers and enclosures shall be match-marked and each cover shall be
installed only on the enclosure with which it was purchased.

10.1.9 Sealing fittings shall be provided and installed in accordance with the NEC.

10.1.10 Where practical, locate service equipment, switchboards, panelboards, and other
electrical equipment in non-hazardous areas.

10.2 CLASS I, DIVISIONS 1 AND 2 LOCATIONS

10.2.1 All Class I hazardous area equipment and material installations shall conform to
NEC Articles 500 and 501, CEC Appendix J and MEC.

10.3 CLASS II, DIVISIONS 1 AND 2 LOCATIONS

10.3.1 All Class II hazardous area equipment and material installation shall conform to
NEC Articles 500 and 502, CEC Section 18-200 and MEC.

10.4 CLASS III DIVISIONS 1 AND 2 LOCATIONS

10.4.1 All Class III hazardous area equipment and material installation shall conform to
NEC Articles 500 and 503, CEC Section 18-300 and MEC.

10.5 CLASS 1, ZONE 0, 1, AND 2 LOCATIONS

10.5.1 All Class 1, Zone hazardous area equipment and material installation shall conform
to NEC Article 505, CEC Section 18-100 and MEC.

10.6 INTRINSICALLY SAFE SYSTEMS

10.6.1 All Intrinsically Safe hazardous area equipment and material installation shall
conform to NEC Articles 500 and 503, CEC Section 18-066 and MEC.

10.7 MISCELLANEOUS CONSIDERATIONS

10.7.1 Local authorities may classify an area in accordance with provisions outlined in
Articles 511 through 517 of the National Electrical Code, Sections 20 through 24 of
the Canadian Electrical Code and MEC even though the NFPA, CEC and MEC
definitions for these areas do not appear to directly apply. This can and has caused
serious operational difficulties in the past. Therefore, certain area classifications
shall be mutually agreed upon prior to design.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 114 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

10.7.1.1 The following are examples of areas requiring special consideration.

1. Garages
2. Fuel dispensing and storage areas
3. Bulk storage areas
4. Spray applications, dispenser and coating process
5. Health care facilities
6. Engine test facilities

10.7.2 Hazardous areas may be reclassified through the use of ventilation systems, which
include interlocks with airflow switches, purge cycles, fume detectors, etc. Area
reclassification shall be discussed with and approved by local authorities prior to
the purchase and installation of any equipment.

Table 10-1

Flexible Conduit Minimum Bending Radius

LENGTH OF
I.D. OF COUPLINGS RADIUS OF BEND
FLEXIBLE PORTION
SIZE IN INCHES (IN INCHES) (IN INCHES)
½ 10 12
¾ 12 15
1 14 21
1¼ 16 14 24
1½ 16 24
2 18 16 27

Template Revised 5-06 Page 115 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

11. PAINTING, IDENTIFICATION, ARC FLASH AND LOCKOUT ENERGY


CONTROL

11.1 PAINTING

11.1.1 Painting of electrical conduit, pull-boxes, starters, safety switches, supports, etc.
shall be the responsibility of the installer only when so specified by the
PURCHASING DIVISION.

11.1.2 Where painting is required and painting specifications are not included in the
contract documents, all exposed conduits, supports, fittings, raceways, pull or
junction boxes, etc., shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with one primer coat
and one finish coat, the color to be selected by the PURCHASING DIVISION. For
galvanized or bare metal surfaces, the primer shall be of the highest quality and
specifically designed for the priming of the surface involved. All paint shall be of
fresh stock, delivered to the job site in sealed cans bearing the manufacturer’s
label and trademark and applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s
requirements.

11.1.3 Enclosures for lighting and power panels, safety switches, etc. which are factory
finished need not be repainted; however, any chipping or marring in the field shall
be repaired to the satisfaction of the Purchasing Division at the installer’s expense.

11.1.4 All painting shall be performed by competent and experienced painters. Where
painting of electrical installations involves electrical hazard to painters, or where
damage to electrical equipment may result, painting shall be performed only under
competent electrical supervision provided by the electrical installer.

11.2 IDENTIFICATION

11.2.1 General

11.2.1.1 Identification of material and equipment shall be in accordance with the NEC, CEC,
or MEC as applicable.

11.2.1.2 All material, equipment, and devices shall be legibly identified with nameplates and
tags, in accordance with the contract documents and SAE HS-1738 as applicable.
A scheme similar to the requirements of Section 11.2.3, Equipment Nameplates
and Tags as approved by the PURCHASING DIVISION shall be followed. When
not specified, the size of the identifying characters shall be consistent with the size
and location of the item to be identified, but shall not be less than 1/4 inch.

11.2.1.3 Nameplates and device identification tags shall be laminated phenolic engraving
stock, a minimum of 0.062 inch thick. Tags shall be white with black characters
unless otherwise specified by national, state or local codes.

Exception 1: Adhesive labels as specified and approved by the PURCHASING


DIVISION, may be used for non-manufacturing equipment enclosure and wiring

Template Revised 5-06 Page 116 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

device nameplates listed in Section 11.2.3, unless otherwise specified in this


standard.

Exception 2: Warning tags described in this section that are yellow with black
letters.

Exception 3: Where environmental conditions require the use of other materials for
tags.

11.2.1.4 Ring type phenolic nameplates shall be used for pushbuttons and pilot lights.

11.2.1.5 Installation of all nameplates, tags and labels shall be completed prior to
application of power to enhance safety and facilitate troubleshooting.

11.2.1.6 Adhesive labeling systems shall comply with UL 969 Marking and Labeling
Systems and be suitable for the environment (temperature, moisture, etc.) and the
surface for which it is being attached.

11.2.1.7 Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before applying self-adhesive
identification products.

11.2.1.8 Coordinate installing electrical identification prior to the installation of acoustical


ceilings and similar finishes that conceal such items.

11.2.2 Mounting

11.2.1.9 Tags and nameplates shall be held in place with metallic drive screws unless
otherwise specified in this standard. The screws shall protrude no further than 0.25
inches inside the enclosure and shall maintain the integrity of the enclosure rating.

11.2.1.10 Tags and nameplates for devices subject to periodic replacement or removal for
repair (e.g., motors, limit switches, pressure switches, and similar devices) shall be
mounted separate from and adjacent to the device.

11.2.3 Equipment Nameplates and Tags

11.2.3.1 Letters shall be black on white background unless otherwise specified by the
PURCHASING DIVISION.

11.2.3.2 Letter sizes shall conform to Table 11-1, Nameplate Letter Sizes unless
otherwise specified.

11.2.3.3 The following nameplate, tag and label requirements and legends shall be provided
unless otherwise specified. Refer to Figure 11-1, Nameplate Legend Diagram.

1. Primary switchgear breakers, substation primary switches, transformers,


secondary breakers, and power factor correction capacitors identification
shall be provided by the manufacturer in accordance with the PURCHASING
DIVISION’S requirements.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 117 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

2. Medium voltage raceway, cable tray and cable shall be identified in manholes,
cable vaults and at splices and terminations. In manholes and cable vaults,
utilize nylon cable ties to attach identification on cables. Interlocked armor
cable identification shall include the feeder source. Tags shall be of the cable
tie or snap-on type. Tags shall be placed wherever cable enters a substation
room, where it enters a switchgear enclosure, inside each switchgear
enclosure, and at each splice and tap location. Cables shall be identified
every 200 feet in cable trays.
3. Cable Tray identification shall include “Danger High Voltage” stick-on warning
tags at 20-foot intervals along tray runs (alternate sides).
4. Tap Box identification shall include a phenolic engraved tag indicating the
primary protective device and feeder number and stick-on “Danger High
Voltage” warning tags.
5. Busway shall have an identification sign every 100 feet and at each
termination. Refer to Figure 11-2, Busway Hanging Sign Detail. The signs
shall not cover the busway joints to allow for infared scans. Busway
identification shall include:
a. Protective device name
b. Unique name of busway run
6. Bus plugs shall be identified as shown in Figure 11-3, Bus Plug and
Equipment Nameplates. Bus plug identification shall include:
a. Device name
b. Load name and location
7. Feeder disconnect switch identification shall include:
a. Device name
b. Protective device name and location
c. Load name and location
8. Motor control center, motor control panel, power panel and power factor
correction capacitors identification shall be provided by the manufacturer
except as indicated below and shown in Figure 11-3, Bus Plug and
Equipment Nameplates, unless otherwise specified by the PURCHASING
DIVISION. Installation identification of the motor control center, motor control
panel, power panel and power factor correction capacitors shall include:
a. Device name
b. Protective device name and location
9. Starter and disconnect switch identification in motor control centers and
power panels shall include:
a. Device name
b. Load name and location

Template Revised 5-06 Page 118 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

10. Combination starter, disconnect switch, transformer and control panel


identification shall be as shown in Figure 11-3, Bus Plug and Equipment
Nameplates and include:
a. Device name
b. Protective device name and location
c. Load name and location
11. Motor identification shall include:
a. Device name
b. Protective device name and location
c. Special characteristics such as explosion proof, special lubrication
requirements, etc.
12. Push button controls, selector switches, etc., shall be clearly identified as to
function (e.g. start, stop, etc.). Additionally, when not part of a motor control
center or individual starter, control stations shall be provided with
identification nameplates in accordance with Section 11.2.1.3 or a custom
legend plate shall be provided by the manufacturer per contract documents.
Identification shall include:
a. Device name
b. Name and location of device controlled
13. Circuit breaker panelboard and mini-load center identification shall include:
a. Device name
b. Protective device name and location
Directories shall be provided in accordance with Section 3.7.14.
14. Interlock circuitry and separately supplied circuits shall be identified as
follows:
a. All control panel enclosures which contain interlock circuitry must have
a yellow warning tag on the outside of the control panel door adjacent to
the main disconnect that states “ORANGE WIRING IS NOT DE-
ENERGIZED BY MAIN DISCONNECT”.
b. Terminal boxes containing interlock wiring shall have a tag on the cover
which reads ‘SEPARATELY ENERGIZED INTERLOCK WIRING
INSIDE”.
c. Devices connected to the line side of the main disconnect, where
permitted by the contract documents, shall be clearly identified by
yellow warning tags stating, “CAUTION – 480 VOLT – SEPARATE
SUPPLY – NOT DE-ENERGIZED BY THE MAIN DISCONNECT”.
Voltage on the tag shall be specific for the application.
15. Receptacle, switch, and cover plate (Section 3.9, Wiring Devices)
identification shall include:
a. Protective device name and location

Template Revised 5-06 Page 119 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

11.2.4 Hazard Identification for Equipment

11.2.4.1 Hazards associated with the specific equipment shall be identified by warning signs.
The equipment manufacturer shall install additional caution signs wherever their
use may enhance the safety of the equipment.

11.2.4.2 Equipment and wiring operating above 600 volts shall be identified by warning
signs stating the operating voltage. Warning signs shall be located on the outside
and inside of each control enclosure, compartment or terminal box where the
higher voltage is present.

11.2.4.3 When specific equipment or procedures must be used to effectively discharge


stored static voltages, this information shall be contained on the required warning
sign.

11.2.5 Switchgear and Substation Room Doors

11.2.4.4 Provide and install on each switchgear and substation room pedestrian door, the
following signs manufactured by W.H. Brady Co. Refer to Figure 11-4, Switchgear
and Substation Room Signs.

1. Danger sign
2. Identification sign

11.2.4.5 Danger signs shall be 1/8 inch fiberglass with embedded legend and grommet
corners (catalog series D-120) and shall comply with OSHA requirements. The
sign shall be nominally 10 inches high by 14 inches wide. The top portion of the
nameplate shall read; “DANGER” in 2 inch high white letters on a red oval
background. The red oval shall be ringed by a white line and set in a horizontal
black rectangle. The bottom portion of the sign shall have black letters on a white
background and shall read; “HIGH VOLTAGE – UNAUTHORIZED PERSONNEL –
KEEP OUT”. Danger signs shall be mounted at eye level on the door with at least
four (4) screws.

11.2.4.6 Identification signs shall be engraved laminated plastic with 1-1/4 black lettering on
a white background. The sign shall be mounted with screws below the Danger sign
and shall read; “SUBSTATION ROOM NO. ____”, or “PRIMARY SWITCH ROOM
NO. ____”.

11.3 ARC FLASH LABELS

11.3.1 Provide and install arc flash hazard labels for switchgear breakers, switchboards,
panelboards, power distribution panels, industrial control panels, meter socket
enclosures, bus plugs, disconnect switches, motor control centers, and other
electrical equipment above 120 volts, in accordance with the NEC and NFPA 70E.
The PURCHASING DIVISION shall provide local labeling requirements,
information for the label, and specify label stock. The label shall conform to ANSI
Z535 and be on UV resistant stock. Labels shall include arc flash hazard boundary,
arc flash incident energy for tasks inside boundary, shock hazard boundaries

Template Revised 5-06 Page 120 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

(limited, restrictive, prohibited), and the minimum personal protective equipment for
the exposure level. The size of the label shall be appropriate for the equipment to
which it will be installed. Refer to example labels in Figure 11-5, Arc Flash Labels.

11.4 LOCKOUT ENERGY CONTROL

11.4.1 General

11.4.3.1 The design of equipment and systems shall be in accordance with the safety
processes and requirements of GM Design for Health and Safety Standard DHS-3.

11.4.3.2 Energy Control must be used whenever an employee is exposed to a hazardous


energy source.

11.4.3.3 Review potential equipment and systems with plant safety personnel to identify
lockout and placard requirements.

11.4.2 Definitions

1. Exposure – Being in a position to be injured by released energy.


2. Hazardous Energy – Energy which could cause injury to the servicing
employee if it is unexpectedly released or used to start up the
machine/equipment being serviced.
3. Energy Isolating Device – With regard to lockout, this is a device that
physically prevents the transmission or release of energy. This does not
include a push button, selector switch, or other control circuit devices.
4. Lockout Placard – A method of identification that provides the information
needed for safe and effective lockout.

11.4.3 Energy-Isolating Devices

11.4.3.4 Provide lockable energy-isolating devices for each source of energy to each piece
of equipment or system.

11.4.3.5 The control circuit and primary energy-isolating devices shall be designed to
provide easy and safe access for service and maintenance task.

11.4.3.6 The location of energy control devices must be as close to the point of access to
the hazard area as possible.

11.4.3.7 Lockable energy-isolating devices (e.g., electrical disconnects) shall be provided to


meet OSHA requirements. These primary energy-isolating devices shall be located
outside the safeguarded area.

11.4.3.8 Access to an energy-isolating device shall not require exposure to any hazardous
motion(s) or situation(s).

Template Revised 5-06 Page 121 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

11.4.4 Lockout Placards

11.4.4.1 Electrical facilities equipment and systems that have only electrical energy sources
and more than one electrical energy source (e.g., Transfer Switches, Central
Battery Inverter Systems, Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems, etc.) shall be
provided with a lockout placard and energy source tags, unless otherwise specified
by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

11.4.4.2 Lockout placards shall be provided which show energy source locations, means to
lockout, verification procedures, and awareness items in accordance with GM
Lockout Energy Control procedures.

11.4.4.3 The original equipment manufacturer or installing contractor shall provide all
placard information for the machine/equipment/system, including the location and
identification of all lockout points and details for appropriate safe operating
practices.

11.4.4.4 The placard shall contain a header, layout drawing (graphic), information grid, and
awareness items. Refer to UAW/GM Lockout Energy Control training manual
#LK101BK. Energy source tags/labels shall be used in conjunction with the placard.

11.4.4.5 Submit lockout placards and procedures for approval, where pertinent to
equipment installed under this contract.

11.4.4.6 All placards and tags shall be made with the GM e-Plac Excel® software tool
provided by CCRW. Generate all lock-out placards with the GM software tool only
or one of these GM approved placard contractors:

1. AOK Controls Eng.


225 West Morley Dr.
Saginaw, MI 48601
Attention: Craig Sterken
PH. 989-753-7000
2. Steptron Technologies, Inc
15866 Fourteen Mile Rd.
Fraser, MI 48026
Attention: David Stephanoff
PH. 810 293-2189
e-mail: dstephan@steptron.com
www.steptron.com

Template Revised 5-06 Page 122 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Table 11-1

Nameplate Letter Sizes

NORMAL VIEWING DISTANCE STROKE WIDTH LETTER HEIGHT

feet inch inch


Up to 3 0.031 0.218
3 to 6 0.062 0.437
6 to 30 0.312 2.312
Over 30 0.421 3.000

Template Revised 5-06 Page 123 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Nameplate Legend Diagram


Figure 11- 1

Template Revised 5-06 Page 124 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Busway Identification Sign Detail


Figure 11- 2

Template Revised 5-06 Page 125 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Bus Plug and Equipment Nameplates


Figure 11- 3

Template Revised 5-06 Page 126 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Switchgear and Substation Room Signs


Figure 11- 4

Template Revised 5-06 Page 127 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Arc Flash Labels


Figure 11- 5

Template Revised 5-06 Page 128 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

12. INSPECTIONS AND FIELD ACCEPTANCE TESTS

12.1 GENERAL

12.1.1 Scope

12.1.1.1 This section provides specifications for material, equipment, labor and technical
supervision to perform and complete the electrical field inspections and acceptance
tests as required for installer furnished and Purchasing Division furnished electrical
material and equipment.

12.1.2 Definitions

12.1.3.1 Acceptance tests as defined in this standard are tests and inspections required to
determine if material and equipment can be energized prior to final operational
tests.

12.1.3.2 Final acceptance will be contingent upon equipment performance and


characteristics as determined by the appropriate tests.

12.1.3.3 These tests are intended to ensure that the workmanship, methods, inspections
and materials used in the installation of equipment are in accordance with
accepted engineering practices and consensus standards such as IEEE, ICEA,
NEMA, ANSI, NFPA, NEC, CEC, MEC and more specifically:

1. The project specifications and drawings for electrical work as prepared by the
Purchasing Division.
2. Equipment manufacturers’ requirements.

12.1.3 Responsibility

12.1.3.1 The installer shall be responsible for all test and test records. Testing shall be
performed by and under the immediate supervision of the installer and shall be
performed by qualified personnel familiar with the equipment and fully experienced
with the specific type of testing. Electrical power equipment and system testing
personnel shall be certified in accordance with ANSI / NETA ETT-2000, “Standard
for Certification of Electrical Testing Personnel” to a Level III or higher.

Exception: For Purchasing Division furnished medium voltage switchgear and


load center unit substations, the manufacturer’s service engineer shall be
responsible for supervising and/or performing testing, calibrations, etc., as
specified in the PURCHASING DIVISION’S equipment specification. The installer
shall be responsible for assisting the manufacturer’s service representative in
performing this work and checking that the work is performed.

12.1.3.2 All testing shall be performed in the presence of the Purchasing Division’s
representative.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 129 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

12.1.3.3 Records of all tests and inspections, including complete data on all readings taken,
shall be made and incorporated into a report for each piece of equipment tested. A
copy of the test reports shall be delivered to the Purchasing Division at the end of
each test period.

12.1.3.4 The installer shall provide all necessary test equipment, shall be responsible for the
set-up of all test equipment, cleanup, visual inspections and any other preliminary
work in preparation for the electrical acceptance tests.

12.1.3.5 The installer shall supply a suitable and stable source of electrical power to each
test location as required.

12.1.3.6 All tests shall be scheduled by the installer and the schedule shall be approved by
the PURCHASING DIVISION.

12.1.3.7 The manufacturer’s representatives shall be advised of all tests on their equipment
and reasonable cooperation shall be extended to permit the witnessing of all tests.
A list of manufacturer’s of the Purchasing Division furnished equipment will be
provided to the installer by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

12.1.3.8 The installer shall perform routine insulation resistance, continuity, phase and
rotation tests for all distribution and utilization equipment and wiring to verify that
circuits are clear of ground conditions before energizing and to prevent equipment
damage and production and schedule delays.

12.1.3.9 Any system, material or workmanship which is found defective on the basis of
acceptance tests shall be reported directly to the Purchasing Division.

12.1.4 Safety and Precautions

12.1.4.1 Prior to performing any testing, the testing personnel shall thoroughly familiarize
themselves with the plant’s safety practices and procedures, as defined in the
PURCHASING DIVISION’S contract documents, and perform testing in strict
accordance with the plant’s safety practices and procedures.

12.1.4.2 It is recognized that an overwhelming majority of the tests and inspections


recommended in these specifications are potentially hazardous. Individuals
performing these tests shall be capable of conducting the tests in a safe manner
and with complete knowledge of the hazards involved. The installer shall follow all
recognized safety practices and procedures which include, but are not limited to
the following:

1. All applicable provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Act,


particularly OSHA 29CFR 1910.
2. Accident Prevention Manual for Industrial Operations, Latest Edition, National
Safety Council.
3. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) Safety/Accident Prevention
Program

Template Revised 5-06 Page 130 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4. National Fire Protection Association NFPA 70E, Standard Electrical Safety


Requirements for Employee Work Places.
5. National Electrical Safety Code – ANSI C2

12.1.4.3 In all cases, Purchasing Division approved work shall not proceed until the
individual responsible for the test procedure has determined that it is safe.

12.1.4.4 The installer shall have available sufficient protective barriers, warning signs and
related protective equipment to conduct specified test safely.

12.2 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

12.2.1 Test Report

12.2.1.1 The test report shall include the following:

1. Summary of project
2. Description of equipment tested
3. Description of test
4. Test results
5. Conclusions and recommendations
6. List of test equipment used and calibration date

12.2.1.2 Provide appropriate testing forms as required for the specific testing. Refer to
Appendix C, Sample Testing Forms, for examples of acceptance test forms. These
sample test forms were taken from NFPA 70B, Electrical Equipment Maintenance
and may not be applicable for the testing required.

12.2.1.3 The test report shall be prepared by the installer, signed by the authorized
witnesses and approved by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

12.2.1.4 A minimum of two sets of the approved test reports shall be furnished to the
PURCHASING DIVISION, unless otherwise specified.

12.2.2 High Potential Tests

12.2.2.1 High potential tests shall be conducted only when authorized by the
PURCHASING DIVISION. High potential test shall not be repeated without
Purchasing Division approval. If authorized, do not exceed the material and
equipment manufacturers’ maximum test voltages or the values contained in Table
12-5 and Table 12-8.

12.2.3 Insulation Resistance Tests

12.2.3.1 Megger insulation testing instruments shall be motor driven or solid state. Test
voltages for insulation resistance tests shall be as specified in Table 12-4.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 131 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

12.2.3.2 When megger readings fall below the specified minimum values, it shall be the
responsibility of the installer to provide corrective measures. The method used by
the installer to obtain specified minimum values shall require the approval of the
PURCHASING DIVISION.

12.2.3.3 If drying is performed by applying an electrical potential to a piece of equipment, in


no case shall the applied voltage or resulting current (induced or direct), exceed
the continuous rating of the equipment being subjected to the drying action.

12.2.3.4 Insulation resistance tests for electrical apparatus and cables shall provide the
minimum readings required at a 68 degree and 60 degree Fahrenheit ambient
temperature, respectively and 70 percent relative humidity, in accordance with
Table 12-4 and Section 12.2.3.6 for medium voltage cables. All readings shall be
recorded.

12.2.3.5 Megger readings taken on electrical apparatus and cables at other than an ambient
temperature of 68 degrees and 60 degrees Fahrenheit respectively shall be
corrected using the temperature correction factors in Table 12-6 and Table 12-7
and in accordance with ICEA Standards for cables.

12.2.3.6 The installer shall calculate the minimum value of insulation resistance for medium
voltage cables by using the following formula:

R = [K Log10 (D/d)] x (1000ft/L)


Where:
R = Insulation resistance in megohms
K = the specific insulation resistance constant in megohms (obtained from
the cable manufacturer)
D = Diameter over insulation
d = Diameter under insulation
L = Length of the cable in feet
The installer shall obtain from the cable manufacturer the coefficient for 1
degree Fahrenheit, and the insulation resistance constant (K) for the specific
type of cable being used. This information shall be based on a 1000-foot length
of cable in a 60 degree Fahrenheit ambient environment.

Example:
Calculate the minimum acceptance value of insulation resistance (R) of
an 800 foot (L), 500 MCM, EPR insulated cable. Correct the field reading
to 60 degrees Fahrenheit.
1. Obtain from the manufacturer:
K = 20,000
Coefficient for 1 degree Fahrenheit = 1.03
2. Determine:

Template Revised 5-06 Page 132 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

D = 1.333 inches
d = 0.813 inch
L = 800 feet
3. Perform calculations:
R = [Log10 (D/d)] x (1000ft/L)
= [20,000 Log10 (1.333/0.813)] x (1000ft/800ft)
= (20,000 Log10 1.64) x (1.25)
= (20,000 x 0.214) x (1.25)
= 5350 Megohms
4. Obtain field megger test value:
Assume a field megger test was conducted under an ambient
temperature of 70 degrees Fahrenheit and a value of 4,125
megohms was obtained.
5. Correct temperature to 60 degree F.:
Assume the cable manufacturer’s coefficient for 1 degree
Fahrenheit is 1.03.
Adjust 4,125 megohms value to reflect a field megger reading taken
at 60 degrees Fahrenheit by utilizing Table 12-4, Temperature
Correction Factors for Insulation Resistance to 15.6 Degrees
Celsius. (60 degrees Fahrenheit) Locate the 1.03 column of
coefficient for 1 degree Fahrenheit table and read across at the 70
degrees Fahrenheit temperature to obtain a temperature correction
factor of 1.35.
Multiply the field-tested value of 4,125 megohms by 1.35 to obtain
5,570 megohms.
By comparing the 5,570-megohm-test value to the calculated 5,350-
megohm minimum acceptable value, the 500 MCM, 800 foot EPR
cable insulation resistance is shown to exceed the minimum
requirements.

12.2.4 Phase Tests

12.2.4.1 It is the intent of this Standard that all power distribution equipment, including but
not limited to, switchgear, busway, panelboards, motor control centers, motor
starters, disconnect switches, etc., shall have a phase arrangement of A-B-C, left
to right, top to bottom and front to back.

12.2.4.2 The installer shall test electrical equipment and wiring to verify proper phase
arrangement and prevent equipment damage and production and schedule delays.
Primary cable and secondary power distribution cable shall be tested and
documented before, during and after cable installations and modifications.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 133 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

12.2.4.3 On equipment connected to two power sources, such as tie breakers and
automatic transfer switches, the installer shall perform cross voltage tests to
ensure that phase A on one source corresponds to phase A on the other source,
phase B to phase B and phase C to phase C.

12.3 MEDIUM AND LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND METAL CLAD AIR
SWITCHES

12.3.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections

12.3.1.1 Prior to energization of the equipment and prior to turnover to the Purchasing
division, the installer shall check that all compartments have been cleaned and
sealed, vents are clear, and that there is no damage to the equipment. Refer to
Section 2.4.

12.3.1.2 Verify that the equipment nameplate information coordinates with the information in
the contract documents.

12.3.1.3 Check that all shipping wires, blocking devices, shipping braces and tags are
removed.

12.3.1.4 Verify that all structural supports are installed, the lineup or switch is level, properly
aligned and secured to the floor, physically connected to the grounding system and
that the doors swing properly and can be readily secured in the closed position.

12.3.1.5 Check all bus field connections for tightness utilizing a calibrated torque wrench.
Check factory bus connections when specified by the PURCHASING DIVISION.
Torque values shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
Factory taped or booted connections shall not be disassembled.

12.3.1.6 Verify that fuse sizes and types are in accordance with the contract documents.

12.3.1.7 Verify the proper installation and operation of barriers and shutters.

12.3.1.8 Insulators shall be inspected for evidence of physical damage or contaminated


surfaces. Contaminated surfaces shall be cleaned in accordance with the
manufacturer’s requirements.

12.3.1.9 Test all key, electrical, mechanical and other interlock systems for proper operation
and sequencing

12.3.1.10 Verify that breakers are properly installed in the respective cubicles according to
the contract documents.

12.3.1.11 Check that the breaker hoist is installed and operates properly.

12.3.1.12 Check mechanical operation of switchblades, indicating devices, linkages, racking


mechanisms, space heaters, and other components for proper operation.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 134 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

12.3.2 Electrical Tests

12.3.2.1 Prior to performing any test on main bus and switches, isolate bus to be tested by
racking out all breakers, opening switches, short and ground current transformer
secondaries, remove potential transformer primary fuses and ground housing.

12.3.2.2 Perform insulation resistance tests on each bus section, phase-to-phase and
phase to ground for one (1) minute. Also megger test across air switchblade
contacts and across primary fuse holders. Test at voltages indicated to ensure
minimum resistances are in accordance with Table 12-4.

12.3.2.3 An A.C. high potential test shall be performed on each medium voltage switchgear
lineup and each metal clad air switch, when specified by the PURCHASING
DIVISION. High potential test shall be performed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s requirements and shall test each bus section phase-to-phase and
phase to ground. Test voltages shall be in accordance with Table 12-8.

12.3.3 Assistance to Equipment Manufacturer’s Service Engineer

12.3.3.1 The installer shall assist the equipment manufacturer’s service engineer to perform
all inspections and tests required by GM 2E, 3E and 4E specifications, the
purchasing documents, and the manufacturer’s service manual. These inspections
and tests include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Verify ratio and polarity on all current and potential transformers and verify
accuracy of all metering devices.
2. Set and calibrate relays and adjust breaker trip settings in accordance with
the contract documents.
3. After energizing test and verify main bus and tie bus phase rotation and
phase matching.

12.4 TRANSFORMERS

12.4.1 Loadcenter Substation Transformers

12.4.1.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections

12.4.1.1.1 The applicable visual and mechanical inspections described in Section 12.3.1
shall be performed.

12.4.1.1.2 Inspect impact (G-Force) recorder prior to unloading and notify Purchasing Division
of the condition.

12.4.1.1.3 Check assembly and torque of primary and secondary connections in accordance
with the manufacturer’s requirements.

12.4.1.1.4 Verify that ventilated dry-type transformers are clean and bus support insulators
are not damaged.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 135 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

12.4.1.2 Assistance to Equipment Manufacturer’s Service Engineer

12.4.1.2.1 The installer shall assist the equipment manufacturer’s service engineer to perform
all inspections and test required by the purchasing documents and the
manufacturer’s service manual. These inspections and tests include, but are not
limited to the following:

1. Verify that all auxiliary devices are operating (e.g., fans, temperature
controllers, relays, sensors, switches, alarms, etc.) in accordance with
manufacturer’s requirements.
2. Verify transformer taps are properly set and check for correct secondary
voltage phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral after energization and prior to
loading.
3. Perform turns-ratio tests at all tap positions. Turns-ratio tests results should
not deviate more than one-half percent from either the adjacent coils or the
calculated ratio.
4. Insulation-resistance and winding continuity tests shall be performed. Prior to
test, isolate transformer by opening primary switch and transformer main
secondary breaker. Calculate polarization index. The polarization index shall
be greater than 1.0. Megger test voltages and readings shall be in
accordance with Table 12-4 when tested as follows:
a. Ground the high side and megger between the low side and ground.
b. Remove the high side ground and ground the low side. Megger
between the high side and ground,
c. Remove the low side ground and connect the high and low sides
together. Megger both windings to ground.
Caution: Care must be exercised in megger testing due to the high capacitances
of the windings of epoxy cast coil transformers.

12.4.2 Transformers (600 Volts and Below)

12.4.2.1 The applicable visual and mechanical inspections described in Section 12.3.1
shall be performed.

12.4.2.2 All transformers rated 100 KVA and above shall be given an insulation resistance
test prior to connecting the cables. Hold all megger tests until the reading reaches
a constant value and until three consecutive equal readings one minute apart are
obtained. Minimum readings shall be in accordance with Table 12-4.

12.5 CIRCUIT BREAKERS

12.5.1 Medium Voltage – Air Magnetic and Vacuum

12.5.1.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections

12.5.1.1.1 The applicable visual and mechanical inspections described in Section 12.3.1
shall be performed.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 136 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

12.5.1.1.2 Assist the manufacturer’s field engineer in checking contact wipe, clearances, and
gaps and operating breakers manually to check the operation of auxiliaries and
interlocks. Refer to Section 12.1.4 for safety and precautions.

12.5.1.2 Electrical Tests

12.5.1.2.1 Measure insulation resistance with a 2500 Volt megger. With contacts open, test
between line and load side of each phase. With contacts closed, test from pole to
pole and from each pole to ground. Minimum acceptance values shall be 1000
megohms.

12.5.1.2.2 For vacuum bottle circuit breakers, perform DC high potential tests across each
vacuum bottle with breaker in the open position in strict accordance with
manufacturer’s requirements.

12.5.2 Low Voltage (600 Volts and Below)

12.5.2.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections

12.5.2.1.1 The applicable visual and mechanical inspections described in Section 12.3.1
shall be performed.

12.5.2.1.2 Open and close mechanically operated circuit breakers.

12.5.2.1.3 For draw-out type circuit breakers, inspect primary fingers on all breakers for
proper contact and alignment to bus stabs.

12.5.2.1.4 For draw-out type circuit breakers, perform three open-close operations in both the
connected and the test positions, using both mechanical and electrical charging
mechanisms. Refer to Section 12.1.4 for safety and precautions.

12.5.2.2 Electrical Tests

12.5.2.2.1 For air magnetic and insulated case circuit breakers, an insulation resistance test
shall be performed at 1000 Volts DC for one (1) minute from pole to pole and from
each pole to ground and across open contacts of each phase. The insulation
resistance shall be in accordance with Table 12-4.

12.5.2.2.2 For electrically operated circuit breakers, energize the control circuits and test the
integrity of the close and trip circuits by opening and closing the necessary control
switches and relay contacts to trip the inserted breakers. Test each breaker
completely with a protective device test set.

12.6 PROTECTIVE RELAYS AND CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIP UNITS

12.6.1 Check that protective relays and trip units on low voltage circuit breakers are set as
specified in the contract documents. Adjustments shall be performed as directed by
the PURCHASING DIVISION. No relay shall be removed from its case for test
without permission of the PURCHASING DIVISION. All relays with provisions for

Template Revised 5-06 Page 137 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

sealing shall be sealed after completion of satisfactory adjustments and tests to


prevent tampering with the settings.

12.6.2 Relays and circuit breaker trip units shall be checked for calibration and operation
by qualified personnel, using appropriate calibrated test equipment.

12.6.3 Calibration stickers shall be installed on the protective device, not on the case and
shall be visible through the cover. The sticker shall have calibrator’s name and
date.

12.7 CABLES

12.7.1 Medium Voltage Cables

12.7.1.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections

12.7.1.1.1 Inspect exposed sections for physical damage.

12.7.1.1.2 Verify cable is supplied and connected in accordance with the contract documents.

12.7.1.1.3 Inspect for proper shield grounding, cable support and cable termination.

12.7.1.1.4 Inspect for cross phasing of cable and proper phase-to-phase and phase to ground
clearances.

12.7.1.1.5 Inspect for proper fireproofing in areas as indicated in Section 5.7.

12.7.1.1.6 If cables are terminated through window type current transformers, verify that
neutrals and grounds are properly terminated for normal operation of protective
devices.

12.7.1.1.7 Inspect for proper phase identification and arrangement.

12.7.1.2 Electrical Tests

12.7.1.2.1 Perform phase tests, insulation resistance tests and high potential (hipot) tests on
all medium voltage cables in accordance with the following procedure, unless an
alternative procedure is specified by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

1. Perform all safety checks and procedures in accordance with Section 12.1.4
and as specified herein.
2. After the cable is installed and before the cable is spliced or connected to any
switchgear, air switch, tap box, motor starter or other equipment, megger test
the cable.
3. Complete the final splices, terminations and/or connections of the cable to
switchgear, air switches, tap boxes, motor starters or other equipment.
4. Perform all safety checks and procedures in accordance with Section 12.1.4
and as specified herein.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 138 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

5. Megger test the spliced and/or connected cable(s).


6. Immediately after the megger test and after approval of the megger test
results by the Purchasing Division, hipot test the cable. Field acceptance test
voltages for 5E and 6E cables shall be in accordance with Table 12-5.
7. Immediately following this hipot test and after discharging the cable, megger
test the cable.

12.7.1.2.2 Before any test work is started, the cable shall be checked and proven to be de-
energized. Cables connected to switches or other equipment shall be disconnected,
cleared and tagged in accordance with the Purchasing Division’s safety procedures.
A worker shall be stationed at each point where cable has exposed connections, to
prevent unauthorized persons from coming into contact with the exposed cable.
Proper PPE shall always be worn when connecting test leads. After each
conductor has been hi-pot tested, the tested conductor shall be grounded to
completely discharge the cable.

12.7.1.2.3 When new cables are spliced into existing cables, the acceptance test shall be
performed on the new cable prior to splicing. After test results are approved for the
new cable and the splice is completed, an insulation-resistance test and shield-
continuity test shall be performed on the length of new and existing cable including
the splice.

12.7.1.2.4 Megger tests shall be performed in accordance with Section 12.2.3. Each
conductor shall be individually tested with all other conductors grounded.

12.7.1.2.5 Hipot tests shall be performed between each conductor and ground with the other
conductors and the metallic shield and armor all grounded to the same ground.
These grounds shall be left in place while the test leads are connected or removed.
Each conductor shall be tested in the same manner.

12.7.1.2.6 Terminations shall be properly corona suppressed by guard rings, field reduction
spheres or other suitable methods. Care shall be taken that the maximum test
voltage does not exceed the limits for terminators as specified in IEEE Standard 48,
IEEE 386, or manufacturer’s specifications.

12.7.1.2.7 Testing shall be in accordance with IEEE Standard 400. Record the temperature
and relative humidity at the test site.

12.7.1.2.8 The initial application of voltage shall not be greater than the rated voltage of the
cable. The rate of increase from the initially applied voltage to the specified test
voltage shall be approximately uniform and shall not exceed 100 percent in 60
seconds. The duration of the hipot test shall be five minutes, unless otherwise
specified by the Purchasing Division.

12.7.1.2.9 During the hipot test, dielectric absorption leakage current readings shall be taken
every 15 seconds during the first two minutes, and every minute during the
remainder of the test. If after the first minute the leakage current increases, the
Purchasing Division’s representative may elect to stop the test and further tests will

Template Revised 5-06 Page 139 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

be made only at his discretion. No test will be accepted where there is a continual
increase in leakage current throughout the test.

12.7.1.2.10 The test record shall include the following:

1. Complete identification of the cable, including approximate length before


splices or taps.
2. Complete identification of other cables and equipment tested in series with
the cable.
3. Megger readings versus time data.
4. Hipot voltage versus time data.
5. Hipot leakage current versus voltage data and plot.
6. Hipot leakage current versus time data and plot.
7. Approximate average cable temperature.
8. Ambient temperature and relative humidity.

12.7.1.2.11 The cable shall withstand the specified high voltage without breakdown. Final
acceptance shall require satisfactory test results on all megger and hipot tests
performed. The minimum megohm readings shall be as specified in Table 12-4.

12.7.1.2.12 After the cable test has been completed, and prior to energizing the cable, the
installer shall walk the entire cable route and perform a visual and safety check to
insure that all grounds and jumpers have been removed and that all personnel
involved in the test are clear.

12.7.1.2.13 No cable shall be energized until the master copy of its test record is approved by
the Purchasing Division.

12.7.2 Low Voltage Cables (600 Volts and Below)

12.7.2.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections

12.7.2.1.1 Cables shall be inspected for physical damage, proper connection and phase
identification.

12.7.2.1.2 Mechanical connections of cable terminal lugs shall be tested to manufacturer’s


requirements with a calibrated torque wrench. In the absence of manufacturer’s
data, the torque values in Table 12-1, Table 12-2 and Table 12-3 shall be utilized.

12.7.2.1.3 Cable color coding shall be in accordance with Section 6, Low Voltage Wiring.

12.7.2.2 Electrical Tests

12.7.2.2.1 Insulation resistance test shall be performed on cables leaving substations,


feeders1/0 AWG and larger and other cables specified by the PURCHASING
DIVISION. Apply megger tests between each conductor and ground with the other
conductors in the conduit or cable grounded to the same ground. The insulation

Template Revised 5-06 Page 140 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

resistance tests shall be performed at 1000 Volts DC for a duration of one minute.
Refer to Table 12-4.

12.8 METAL ENCLOSED BUSWAYS

12.8.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections

12.8.1.1 Busways shall be inspected for clean surfaces, physical damage and proper
connection in accordance with the contract documents.

12.8.1.2 Busways shall be inspected for proper bracing, suspension, alignment and
enclosure ground in accordance with manufactures requirements and contract
documents.

12.8.1.3 Recheck all connections utilizing a calibrated torque wrench in accordance with the
manufacturer’s requirements.

12.8.1.4 Verify proper physical orientation of busway according to the manufacturer’s


requirements and perform continuity tests on each conductor to verify that proper
phase relationships exist.

12.8.1.5 Check visually and electrically that isolation joints are isolated.

12.8.1.6 Verify that weep-hole plugs for outdoor busway are removed and that joint shields
are properly installed.

12.8.2 Electrical Tests

12.8.2.1 Measure the insulation resistance of each busway run, phase-to-phase and phase
to ground with the other phases to the same ground for a duration of one minute.
The test voltages and minimum acceptable values shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s requirements and Table 12-4.

12.8.2.2 AC high potential tests shall be performed on medium voltage busway when
specified by the PURCHASING DIVISION. High potential tests shall be performed
in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and shall test each busway
run phase to phase and phase to ground with phases not under test grounded.
Test voltages shall be in accordance with Table 12-8.

12.9 ROTATING EQUIPMENT

12.9.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections

12.9.1.1 Inspect for physical damage.

12.9.1.2 Inspect for proper anchorage, mounting, alignment, grounding and connection.

12.9.1.3 Special test, such as gap spacing, pedestal alignment and vibration baseline tests
shall be performed in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements and GM
Specification V1.0a (GM-1761), when specified by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 141 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

12.9.2 Electrical Tests

12.9.2.1 An insulation resistance test shall be performed on electric motors rated above 600
volts or over 100 hp. The insulation resistance tests shall be performed between
all windings and ground. Refer to Table 12-4 for minimum test requirements.
Calculate the polarization index for motors over 200 horsepower. Calculate
dielectric absorption for motors over 100 horsepower to 200 horsepower.
Investigate dielectric absorption ratios less than 1.4 and polarization index ratios
less than 2.0 for Class B and Class F insulation motors.

12.9.2.2 Motors shall be checked for proper rotation and alignment. If rotation could
damage the equipment, arrangements shall be made to mechanically uncouple the
motor.

12.9.2.3 Any connections found to be in error shall be corrected by the installer and
reinsulated as required.

12.10 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS, MOTOR CONTROLLERS AND CONTROL


EQUIPMENT

12.10.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections

12.10.1.1 Inspect the equipment for physical damage.

12.10.1.2 Inspect for proper connections, grounding and conduit terminations check tightness
of bus connections with a torque wrench in accordance with the manufacturer’s
requirements.

12.10.1.3 Check that all units are identified (e.g., nameplates, tags, labels) in accordance
with the contract documents. Check for warning tags on units with interlock wiring.

12.10.2 Electrical Tests

12.10.2.1 When directed by the PURCHASING DIVISION, perform an insulation resistance


test on the motor control center or motor controller. Isolate bus by opening supply
switch or breaker, and opening load disconnects. Apply megger test between each
phase and ground with all other phases grounded to the same ground. Test each
phase in the same manner. The test duration shall be five minutes and the test
shall be five minutes and the test shall be in accordance with Table 12-4

12.10.2.2 When directed by the PURCHASING DIVISION, perform an insulation resistance


test on the starters and contactors, perform insulation resistance test on each pole,
phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with device closed and across each open
pole for one minute. Test voltage shall be accordance with manufacturer’s
published data.

12.11 HIGH VOLTAGE DETECTORS

12.11.1 Each facility should have a portable self-contained device for fast and positive
determination of the presence of AC voltage above 600 volts. The instrument shall

Template Revised 5-06 Page 142 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

be designed for indoor or outdoor use under any service condition without requiring
auxiliary equipment, calibration or connections to ground. Proper safety procedures
must be followed and other safety equipment must be utilized whenever working
above 600 Volts.

12.12 GROUNDING SYSTEMS

12.12.1 Visual and Mechanical Inspections

12.12.1.1 Inspect ground system to ensure compliance with the contract documents.

12.12.2 Electrical Tests

12.12.2.1 Ground resistance measurements shall be made on each individual ground rod
and on each basic ground system installed under the contract. Tests shall be
performed by the three-point method described in IEEE Standard 81. Ground
resistance measurements shall be made only in normally dry weather and not less
than 48 hours after rainfall.

12.12.3 Test Values

12.12.3.1 The system resistance to ground of the ground rods shall not exceed five (5) ohms
for industrial systems.
12.12.3.2 The system resistance to ground of concrete encased electrodes (Ufer Ground)
shall not exceed two (2) ohms for industrial systems.
12.12.3.3 The system resistance to ground of ground mats shall not exceed one (1) one ohm
or less for generating or transmission stations.
12.12.3.4 The system resistance to ground of ground mats shall not exceed two (2) ohms for
industrial systems.
12.12.3.5 Where resistance to ground is greater than these test values, notify the Purchasing
Division promptly and provide recommendations to obtain the above values.

12.12.4 Test Records

12.12.4.1 The ground resistance measurements required above shall be certified and
submitted to the Purchasing Division. The installer shall submit in writing to the
Purchasing Division, upon completion of the testing, the measured ground
resistance of each grounding system, indicating the location and size of each
ground electrode and each grounding system including all supplementary
electrodes required, and the soil conditions at the time measurements were taken.
The installer shall also furnish complete data on the methods of testing and the
instruments used in the test.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 143 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Table 12-1
U.S. Standard
Bolt Torques for Bus Connections
Heat Treated Steel Bolts

SAE SAE SAE SAE


GRADE
1&2 5 6 8
MINIMUM TENSILE
(P.S.I.) 64K 105K 133K 150K

BOLT DIAMETER TORQUE (FOOT POUNDS)


1/4 4.0 5.6 8.0 8.4
5/16 7.2 11.2 15.2 17.6
3/8 12.0 20.0 27.2 29.6
7/16 19.2 32.0 44.0 48.0
½ 29.6 48.0 68.0 73.6
9/16 42.4 70.4 96.0 105.6
5/8 59.2 96.0 133.6 144.0
¾ 96.0 160.0 224.0 236.8

Table 12-2

Bolt Torques for Bus Connections


Silicon Bronze Fasteners*
Torque (Foot Pounds)
Diameter Non-Lubricated Lubricated
5/16 15 10
3/8 20 14
½ 40 25
5/8 55 40
¾ `70 60
* Bronze alloy bolts shall have a minimum tensile strength of 70,000 pounds per square inch.
Table 12-3
Bolt Torques for Bus Connections
Stainless Steel Fasteners**
Torque (Foot Pounds)
Diameter Uncoated
5/16 14
3/8 25
½ 45
5/8 60
¾ 90
**bolts, cap screws, nuts, flat washers, locknuts: 18-8 alloy Belleville washers: 302 alloy

Template Revised 5-06 Page 144 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Table 12-4

INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST REQUIREMENTS

ITEM Voltage Rating


DC Test Min. Megohm
600 V 601 – 5000 V 5001 – 15000 V Voltage Reading

Cable X 1000 50
X 2500 Notes 1& 4
X 2520 Notes 1& 4
Busway X 1000 100
(Note 3) X 2500 1000
X 2500 5000
Transformer X 1000 500
Winding X 2500 5000
(Dry Type) X 5000 25000
Transformer X 1000 100
Winding X 2500 1000
(Liquid Type) X 5000 5000
X 1000 100
Motors X 2500 1000
X 2500 5000
X 1000 100
Switchgear X 2500 1000
X 2500 5000
MCC X 1000 100

Notes:

1. These values are based on ambient temperatures of 60 degrees F (15.6 deg C) and a
relative humidity of 70 percent. The installer shall record the temperature and humidity at
the time of testing.
2. Values of insulation resistance which are less than manufacturer’s minimum or Table 12-4
shall be investigated. Over potential tests should not proceed until insulation-resistance
levels are raised above minimum values. Temperature correction calculations shall be in
accordance with Table 12-6 and Table 12-7.

3. Insulation-resistance test voltages and resistance values shall be in accordance with


manufacturer’s requirements or Table 12-4. 600-volt busway minimum resistance values
are for a nominal 1000-foot busway run. Use the following formula to convert the
measured resistance value to the 1000-foot nominal value:

R1000 ft = Measured Resistance x Length of Run


1000

Converted values of insulation resistance less than the manufacturer’s minimum value or
those in Table 12-4 shall be investigated.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 145 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4. Calculation procedures for cable temperature correction shall be in accordance with ICEA
Standards. Refer to Section 12.2.3.6 for calculation procedures for these values.

TABLE 12-5

Test Voltages for GM 5E and 6E Cables

Acceptance Test
Voltage Insulation Level
Class Thickness DC Test Voltage
(New Cables)

5001 – 8000V 140 mils Consult manufacturer


8001 – 15,000V 220 mils 50 KV
Solidly grounded
(133% level)
8001 – 15,000V 260 mils 50 KV
Resistively grounded
or ungrounded
(173% level)

Notes:

1. When older cables or other types/classes of cables or accessories are connected to


the system, consult the manufacturers of the cables and/or accessories before
applying any test voltage.

2. Under no circumstances shall cable ever be tested at higher than the following levels
with splices or while it is connected to switchgear, air switches, tap boxes, motor
starters or any other utilization equipment:

Utilization Voltage Class Maximum DC Test Voltage

5,000 Volts 27 KV
15,000 Volts 50 KV

Template Revised 5-06 Page 146 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

TABLE 12-6

Cable Temperature Correction Factors for Insulation Resistance


(Factors corrected to 60F (15.6C))

Temperature Coefficient for 1F


F C 1.03 1.04 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.08 1.09 1.10 1.11 1.12
50 10.0 0.75 0.68 0.62 0.56 0.51 0.46 0.42 0.38 0.35 0.32
51 10.6 0.77 0.70 0.65 0.59 0.54 0.50 0.46 0.42 0.39 0.36
52 11.1 0.79 0.73 0.68 0.63 0.58 0.54 0.50 0.47 0.43 0.40
53 11.7 0.82 0.76 0071 0.67 0.62 0.58 0.55 0.51 0.48 0.45
54 12.2 0.84 0.79 0.75 0.70 0.67 0.63 0.60 0.56 0.54 0.51
55 12.8 0.87 0.82 0.78 0.75 0.71 0.68 0.65 0.62 0.60 0.57
56 13.3 0.89 0.86 0.82 0.76 0.76 0.74 0.71 0.69 0.66 0.64
57 13.9 0.92 0.89 0.87 0.84 0.82 0.80 0.78 0.76 0.73 0.71
58 14.4 0.94 0.93 0.91 0.90 0.88 0.86 0.85 0.83 0.82 0.80
59 15.0 0.97 0.96 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.89
60 15.6 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00
61 16.1 1.03 1.04 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.08 1.09 1.10 1.11 1.12
62 16.7 1.06 1.08 1.10 1.13 1.15 1.17 1.19 1.21 1.24 1.27
63 17.2 1.09 1.13 1.16 1.19 1.23 1.26 1.30 1.34 1.38 1.42
64 17.8 1.13 1.17 1.22 1.26 1.31 1.36 1.41 1.47 1.53 1.58
65 18.3 1.16 1.22 1.28 1.34 1.40 1.47 1.54 1.62 1.70 1.78
66 18.9 1.20 1027 1.35 1.42 1.50 1.59 1.69 1.78 1.88 1.98
67 19.4 1.23 1.32 1.41 1.51 1.62 1.72 1.84 1.96 2.09 2.21
68 20.0 1.27 1.37 1.48 1.60 1.72 1.85 1.99 2.15 2.31 2.48
69 20.6 1.31 1.43 1.55 1.69 1.84 2.00 2.18 2.36 2.57 2.77
70 21.1 1.35 1.48 1.63 1.79 1.97 2.17 2.38 2.60 2.85 3.10
71 21.7 1.39 1.54 1.72 1.90 2.11 2.34 2.59 2.87 3.17 3.46
72 22.2 1.43 1.60 1.80 2.02 2.26 2.53 2.82 3.15 3.52 3.90
73 22.8 1.47 1.67 1.89 2.14 2.42 2.72 3.08 3.46 3.90 4.37
74 23.3 1.52 1.74 1.98 2.27 2.58 2.94 3.35 3.81 4.31 4.88
75 23.9 1.56 1.80 2.08 2.40 2.76 3.18 3.65 4.19 4.78 5.47
76 24.4 1.61 1.87 2.19 2.54 2.96 3.43 3.98 4.61 5.30 6.12
77 25.0 1.66 1.95 2.30 2.70 3.17 3.70 4.34 5.08 5.88 6.85
78 25.6 1.71 2.02 2.41 2.86 3.39 4.00 4.73 5.59 6.51 7.68
79 26.1 1.76 2.11 2.53 3.03 3.62 4.33 5.16 6.14 7.27 8.59
80 26.7 1.81 2.19 2.66 3.21 3.87 4.67 5.61 6.72 8.07 9.65
81 27.2 1.87 2.28 2.80 3.40 4.15 5.04 6.12 7.43 8.98 10.80
82 27.8 1.92 2.37 2.94 3.60 4.43 5.45 6.69 8.18 9.92 12.10
83 28.3 1.98 2.47 3.08 3.82 4.72 5.89 7.28 9.00 11.00 13.60
84 28.9 2.04 2.57 3.23 4.05 5.04 6.35 7.92 9.90 12.2 15.2
85 29.4 2.10 2.67 3.40 4.30 5.42 6.84 8.67 10.8 13.5 17.0
Note: Table taken from ICEA.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 147 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Table 12-7
Apparatus Insulation Resistance Conversion Factors 20 C (68oF)

Test Temperatures to 20 C (68o F)


Temperature Multiplier
o o Apparatus Containing Apparatus Containing
C F
Immersed Oil Insulation Solid Insulation
-10 14 0.125 0.25
-5 23 0.180 0.32
0 32 0.25 0.40
5 41 0.36 0.50
10 50 0.50 0.63
15 59 0.75 0.81
20 68 1.00 1.00
25 77 1.40 1.25
30 86 1.98 1.58
35 95 2.80 2.00
40 104 3.95 2.50
45 113 5.60 3.15
50 122 7.85 3.98
55 131 11.20 5.00
60 140 15.85 6.30
65 149 22.40 7.90
70 158 31.75 10.00
75 167 44.70 12.60
80 176 63.50 15.80
85 185 89.789 20.00
90 194 127.00 25.20
95 203 180.00 31.60
100 212 254.00 40.00
105 221 159.15 50.40
110 230 509.00 63.20

Note: Table taken from NETA.

Formula: Rc = Ra x K Example: Resistance test on oil-immersion


insulation at 104o
Where: Rc is resistance corrected to 20o C Ra = 2 megohms @ 104oF
Ra is measured resistance test K = 3.95
Temperature
Rc = Ra x K
K is applicable multiplier
Rc = 2.0 x 395
Rc = 7.90 megohms @ 20oC

Template Revised 5-06 Page 148 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

TABLE 12-8

AC TEST VOLTAGES FOR MEDIUM VOLTAGE BUSWAY AND SWITCHGEAR

Voltage High Potential


Class Test Voltage

5 KV 14 KV, 60Hz., 1 minute


Consult manufacturer

15 KV 27 KV, 60Hz., 1 minute


Consult manufacturer

Template Revised 5-06 Page 149 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

APPENDIX A: REFERENCE TO OTHER CODES, STANDARDS, AND


SPECIFICATIONS

The following sources of reference codes, standards, and specifications are included as a guide
and as minimum requirements where not covered by this standard. The electrical and physical
properties of all materials, and the design, performance characteristics, and methods of
construction of all items of equipment shall be in accordance with the latest issue of these codes,
standards, and specifications. This listing is intended to identify pertinent codes, standards, and
specifications and is not to be construed to be all-inclusive.

Where there is a difference between the standards, codes, specifications and this standard, the
most stringent requirements shall apply. Clarifications of any differences between the standards,
codes, drawings, and specifications will be made by the Purchasing Division.

A-1 American Concrete Institute (ACI)


22400 W. 7 Mile Road, Detroit, Michigan 48219
ACT 315 Reinforcing Concrete Structures
ACT 318 Reinforcing Concrete

A-2 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)


1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018
*ANSI C37.20.1 Metal-Enclosed Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear
*ANSI C37.20.2 Metal-Clad and Stationary Type Cubical Switchgear
*ANSI C37.20.3 Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear Including Metal Enclosed
Bus
ANSI C2 National Electrical Safety Code
ANSI C80.5 Rigid Steel Conduit
ANSI C84.1 Voltage Rating for Electrical Power Systems and Equipment (60 Hertz)
*Approved as an IEEE Standard

A-3 ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials


1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103
ASTM A-615 Reinforcing Steel
ASTM A-616 Reinforcing Steel
ASTM B-3 Specifications for Soft Annealed Copper Wire
ASTM B-8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard or Soft
ASTM C-33 Specifications for Concrete Aggregate
ASTM C-94 Ready Mix Concrete Aggregate
ASTM C-150 Specifications for port land concrete

Template Revised 5-06 Page 150 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

ASTM C-494 Additives to Retard of Accelerate, Specification for Chemical


Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM D-1557 Modified Proctor Test
ASTM D-2564 Solvent Cement
ASTM 637.46 Specifications for Power Fuses as Fuse Disconnection Switches

A-4 Canadian Standards Association (CSA)


178 Rexdale Blvd., Rexdale, Ontario, Canada M9W 1R3
CSA Standard C22.1 1-1986, Canadian Electrical Code Part 1, 15th Edition
Ontario Hydro Electrical Safety Code, Supplement to CSA Standard C22.1

A-5 MEXICAN NOM-001-SEDE-2005, Mexican Electrical Code

A-6 National Association of Standardization and Certification of the Electrical


Sector (ANCE)
Av. Eje Central Lázaro Cárdenas No. 869, Col. Nva. Ind. Vallejo, México, D.F.
07700, MÉXICO

A-7 General Motors Corporation Standards and Specifications (GM)


Worldwide Facilities Group, Capital Projects
1E-DRY Dry-Type Power Transformers Including Vacuum-Pressure Sealed Epoxy
Cast Resin and Sealed Dry 35 KV And Below
1E-LLF Large Liquid Filled Power Transformers Larger than 5,000 KVA
1E-SLF Small Liquid Filled Power Transformers 5,000 KVA and Smaller, 15 KV and
Below
2E Medium Voltage Metal Clad Switchgear and Vacuum Circuit Breakers
3E Indoor Substation Incoming Line Section with Stationary, Fused Load Break
Switches (Rated 15,000 Volts, 60 Hertz)
4E Indoor Substation Metal Enclosed Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Switchgear
(Rated 600 Volts, 60 Hertz)
5E Medium Voltage Armor Power Cable
6E Triplexed and Pre-assembled Aerial Medium Voltage Power Cable
7E-TA High Efficiency Industrial Motors
7EH High Efficiency Industrial Motors
7E-MV Medium Voltage Motors
8E-BAL Electronic Ballast for 32 Watt Fluorescent Lamps
8E-HID1 Indoor Industrial HID Lighting Fixtures
8E-HID2 Outdoor Lighting Fixtures

Template Revised 5-06 Page 151 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

9E Medium Voltage Cable Tap Box Air Insulated 15KV Class


11E 600 Volt Interlock Armor Cable
12E Motor Control Centers and Combination Motor Starters 600 Volts and below
12E-ASD Low Voltage Adjustable Speed Drive Motor Controllers for Facilities Loads
12E-SS Low Voltage Soft Start Motor Controllers for Facilities Loads
13E 600 Volt Sandwich Type Busway
14E Medium Voltage Cable Terminations
14ES Medium Voltage Cable Splices
GM NAO 0070, Common Electrical Power Distribution Documentation Guideline
SAE-HS-1738 Standard for Electrical Equipment for Automotive Industrial Machinery
IS&S Gold Build Definition for Grounding and Bonding
HS1 Hydraulic Standard for industrial equipment
PSI Pneumatic Standard PSI for Industrial Equipment

A-8 Factory Mutual (FM)


1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike, Norwood, MA 02062

A-9 GE Global Asset Protection (GAP), Insurance Underwriter


Avon, CONN.

A-10 Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)


283 Valley Road, Montclair, NJ 07042
*ICEA S-19-81 Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and
Distribution of Electrical Energy
*ICEA S-68-516 Ethylene-Propylene Rubber-Insulated Wire and Cable for the
Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy
*Approved as a NEMA Standard

A-11 Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)


345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017
IEEE 48 Test Procedures and Requirements for High Voltage AC Cable
Terminations
**IEEE 81 Grade for Measuring Earth Resistance, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface Potential of a Ground System
**IEEE 400 The Guide for Making High Direct Voltage Test on Power Cable Systems
in the Field
**Approved as an American National Standard (ANSI)

Template Revised 5-06 Page 152 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

A-12 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)


2101 L Street, N.W., Suite 300 Washington, DC 20037
NEMA BU-1 Busway
NEMA KS-1 Enclosed Switches
NEMA MG-1 Motors and Generators
NEMA MG-3 Sound Level Prediction for Installed Rotating Electrical Machines
NEMA PB-1 Panel Boards
NEMA TC-2 Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80)
NEMA TR1 Transformers, Regulations and Reactors
NEMA ST-20 General Application Dry-Type Transformers
NEMA WD-1 General Purpose Wiring Devices

A-13 (Inter) National Electrical Testing Association (NETA)


1718 Connecticut Avenue N.W. Suite 310 Washington, DC 20009

A-14 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)


Batterymark Park, Quincy, MA 02269
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code
NFPA 70B Electrical Equipment Maintenance
NFPA 70E Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Work Places
NFPA 77 Static Electricity
NFPA 78 Lightning Protection Code
NFPA 79 Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery

A-15 Occupational Safety and Health Administration, (OSHA)


Federal Register, Department of Labor, 1 Superintendent of Documents, U.S.
Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402
OSHA 29 CFR Part 1910 Subpart 5, Electrical Standards

A-16 Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)


1285 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, Long Island, MNY 11747
1655 Scott Blvd., Santa Clara, CA 95050
333 Pfingsten Road, Northbrook, IL 60062 and
2602 Tampa East Blvd., Tampa, FL 33619
UL 1 Flexible Metal Electrical Conduit
UL 5 Surface Metal Electrical Raceway and Fittings, Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit
UL 50 Electrical Cabinets and Boxes
UL 67 Panelboards

Template Revised 5-06 Page 153 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

UL 98 Safety Standard for Enclosed and Dead Front Switches


UL 209 Cellular Metal Floor Raceway and Fittings
UL 248 Low voltage Fuses
UL 360 Liquid Tight Flexible Steel Conduit
UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment
UL 508A Industrial Control Panels
UL 514A Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings
UL 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes
UL 514C Non-Metallic Outlet Boxes, Flush Device Boxes and Covers
UL 651 Schedule 40 and 80 PVC Conduit
UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing
UL 810 Capacitors
UL 844 Hazardous Locations
UL 845 Electric Motor Control Centers
UL 857 Busway and Associated Fittings
UL 850 Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters and Associates Fittings
UL 884 Standard for Underfloor Raceway and Fittings
UL 1242 Intermediate Metal Conduit
UL 1572 Damp and Wet Locations
UL 1569 Metal –Clad Cable

A-17 Telecommunication Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance


(EIA/TIA)
3839 Mike Padgett Highway, Augusta, Georgia 30906

EIA / TIA 607 Commercial Building Grounding/Bonding Requirements for


Telecommunications

Template Revised 5-06 Page 154 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

APPENDIX B: PURCHASING DIVISION REQUIREMENT LISTING

The following referenced section listing has been provided in order to make the PURCHASING
DIVISION and installer / equipment supplier aware of the specific items in this standard in which
the type of design, product, or system required is dictated by the PURCHASING DIVISION. The
PURCHASING DIVISION shall provide this information to the installer/equipment supplier in the
bid documents.

Section Description
1.2.3.1 Unique Electrical Systems
1.6.2 Deviations from Standard
1.11.2 Reproducible Media Type
1.11.8 Working Drawings Requirement
1.11.9 Working Drawings Format
2.1.3 Sub-assembled equipment - passage
2.7.1.3 Low Voltage Tie Busway – plug-in sections
2.8.1 Substation Tool Cabinets
2.9.1 High Voltage Detectors
2.10.1 Hoist Unit - specification
2.11.1 Diagram Boards – quantity and location
2.11.3
3.1.2.10 Vertical Busway Guarding
3.1.3.8 Trolley Busway Supports
3.3.1 Power Receptacle (480 Volts) Type
3.4.4.1 Enclosure Pad/Riser Mounting and Anchoring
3.4.4.2 Enclosure Clearance
3.6.1 Power Factor Correction Capacitors
3.10.1.6 Luminaire Adjustment
3.10.2.1 Fluorescent Luminaire Support
4.1.5 Conduit Fitting Types
4.2.1.2 Overhead Conduit Installation
4.2.3.1 Conduit Types
4.2.14.8 Large Junction and Pull Boxes
4.6.1.5.1 Basket Tray

Template Revised 5-06 Page 155 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

4.7.7.9 Conduit From Duct Bank to Building


4.7.9.1.1 Prefabricated Handholes
5.3.8 Messenger Cable Installation
5.5.1.5 Primary Cable pulling calculations
5.5.1.15 Primary Cable Installation
5.6.1.1 Termination and Splicing Specifications
5.6.1.5 Primary Splicing Environment
5.6.3.1 Permission to Splice (Primary)
6.5.1 Portable Cord Types
6.6.1 Metal Clad Cable
6.7.1 Manufactured Wiring Systems
6.8.1.1 Bus Drop Cable
6.9.1 Exposed Run Tray Cable
6.10.6.1 Permission to Splice (Low Voltage)
6.12.3 Conductor Identification
7.1.6 Fuse Provider
8.5.6.2 Separate Grounding Conductor
8.5.8.1 Computer and Telecommunications
Equipment Room and Plant Floor Cabinet
9.1.4 Drilling or Welding to Building Steel
9.1.5 Permission to Stud Weld
9.1.6 Explosive Type Fastening
9.7.1 Clamping and Mounting Details
10.1.2 Identification of Hazardous Area
11.1.1 Painting Requirements
11.1.2 Paint Colors
11.2.1 Identification Scheme and Adhesive labels
11.2.3.1 Nameplate Letters and Background
11.2.3.3 Substation Identification
11.3.1 Arc Flash Labels
11.4.4.1 Lockout Placards
12.1.3.1 Project Testing Specifications
12.1.3.6 Testing Schedule

Template Revised 5-06 Page 156 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

12.1.3.7 Purchasing Division Furnishes Equipment


List
12.1.4.1 Safety Requirements
12.2.1.3 Test Report Approval
12.2.1.4 Number of Test Reports
12.2.2.1 High Potential Test Authorization
12.2.3.2 Megger Test – Corrective Action
12.3.1.5 Bus Connection Torque Check
12.3.2.3 Switchgear – A.C. High Potential Test
12.6.1 Protective Relay Handling and Adjustments
12.7.1.2.1 Cable D.C. High Potential Test
12.7.2.2.1 Low Voltage Cable Testing
12.8.2.2 Busway A.C. High Potential Test
12.9.1.3 Rotating Equipment Test
12.10.2.1 MCC Insulation Resistance Test

Template Revised 5-06 Page 157 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

APPENDIX C: SAMPLE TESTING FORMS

Air Circuit Breaker – Inspection Record


Plant Date
Location Serial No.
MFR. Type or Model
Draw out Non-draw out Switch board Metalclad
Rating: Volts Amps Interrupting Amps
Operation: Manual Electrical Remote Control
Volts close AC DC Volts trip AC DC
Protective Devices: Induction Relays Direct Trips
CL Fuses TD Setting INST Setting

ANNUAL INSPECTION
DATE DATE
INSPECTOR’S INITIAL INSPECTION’S INITIALS
MAIN

MAIN

MAIN

MAIN
AUX

AUX

AUX

AUX

OPERATING MECHANISMS
CONTRACT CONDITION CHECKS
Good – Surface Smooth Positive Close & Trip
Fair – Minor Burns Bushing & Pin Wear
Poor – Burned & Pitted Set Screws & Keepers
Protective Devices
CONTACT CHECK Lubricate Wear Points
Pressure (Good, Weak, Bad)
Alignment (Good, Bad) Clean Pots and Replace Oil With Eqpt. Mfrs.
DRAWOUT CONTACTS Recommended Oil
Pressure (Good, Weak, Bad)
Alignment (Good, Bad) INSULATION CONDITION
Lubricate (Must do-Use A Loose Connections
No-Oxide Lubricant by Mfr. Discolored Areas
ARCING ASSEMBLIES Corona Tracking
Clean and Check the Arc Clean Surfaces
Splitting Plates
Surface Conditions INSULATION TESTS ``
BUSHINGS Phase to Phase (Megohm)
Clean and Check Phase to Ground Megohm)
Surface Condition
TEST OPERATION
Close & Trip
Counter Reading (No. of Ops.)

ELECTRICAL LOAD
Peak Indicated Amps

Remarks: (Record action taken when indicated by Inspection or Tests

Other Repairs Recommended:


Reprinted with permission from NFPA 70B-1983, Recommended for Electrical Maintenance, Copywrite, 1983, National Fire Protection Association, Quinzy, MA 02269.
This reprint is not the completed official position of the NFPA on the reinforced subject, which is presented only by the standard in entirety.Air circuit breaker test and
inspection report

Template Revised 5-06 Page 158 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Air Circuit Breaker Test and Inspection Report

Customer Date Work Order No.


Address Air Temp. Rel. Humidity
Breaker Owner/User Date Last Inspection
Address Last Inspection Report No.
Equipment Location
Owner Identification
BREAKER DATA:
Manufacturer Voltage Type Amps Int. Rating
Serial No. Type Oper. Mech. Age Other N.P. Date

INSPECTION AND Cleaned See


TEST DATA Tank 1 Tank 2 Tank 3
MAINTENANCE Insp. Dirty Lubed Remarks
Insp Res Kv. Megohms Overall Cleanliness
Contract Resistance, Microhms Insulating Members
Closing Speed/Opening Speed Mech. Connections
Reference, P.F. Test Sheet No. Structural Members
Cubicle
Mfr’s As As Pri. Contact Fingers
ADJUSTMENTS
Rec. Found Left Shutter Mech.
Arcing Contact Wipe Relays
Main Contact Gap Auxiliary Devices
Main Contact Wipe Racking Device
Latch Wipe Arc Chutes
Latch Clearance Blow Out
Contact Travel Puffers
Prop Clearance Liner
Stop Clearance Arc Runner
Main Contacts
Cubicle Wiring
Breaker Wiring
Heaters
Panel Lights
Bearings

Contact Sequence
Ground Connection
Counter Reading

Remarks:

Inspection & Test by: Equipment Used: Sheet No.

Reprinted with permission from NFPA 70B-1983, Recommended Practice for Electrical Maintenance, Copywrite, 1983, National Fire Protection
Association, Quincy, MA 02269. This reprinted material I not the complete and official position of the NFPA on the referenced subject which is
represented only by the standard in its entirety.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 159 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Low Voltage Circuit Breaker Five Year Tests Form

Plant Date

Substation Feeder Load Reading

BREAKER DATA

Mfr. Type Serial No.

Trip Coil Rating Amp Characteristics Mfr’s Time Curve


Trip Devices: Long Time Delay Short Time Delay Instantaneous Trip
Time Delay Type: Oil Sucker Dashpot Air Bellows Air Office Air Office Other
Settings:
LT Delay – Amps Adjustable Range Time Adjustable? Yes No
ST Delay – Amps Adjustable Range Time Adjustable? Yes No

Instantaneous Trip – Amps Adjustable? Yes No

TEST DATA

Date of Test LEFT CENTER RIGHT TIME RANGE


Inspector’s Initials POLE POLE POLE FROM CURVE
AS FOUND TEST (Trip Time in Seconds)

% Pickup Amps

TIME DELAY (As found – Amps)


MINIMUM PICKUP
(Nullify Time Delay) (Adjusted – Amps)
TIME DELAY TESTS (Trip Time in Seconds)
% Pickup Amps
Long Time

Short Time

RESETTABLE DELAY (Satisfactory)

(__% For __ sec) (Tripped)

INSTANTANEOUS TRIP (As Found – Amps)


(Adjusted – Amps)

Template Revised 5-06 Page 160 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Electrical Switchgear – Associated Equipment Inspection Record

Plant Date
Location Serial No. P&G No.
MFR. Year Installed
Rating: Volts Bus Capacity Amps Interrupting Amps
Type: Switchboard Indoor Metalclad Outdoor Metalclad
ANNUAL INSPECTION (Disregard items which do not apply)
DATE DATE
INSPECTOR’S INITIALS INSPECTOR’S INITIALS
SWITCHBOARDS DISCONNCT SWITCHES
Clean Check Contact Surfaces
Check Wiring Check Insulation Condition
Inspect Panel Insulation Lubricate per Mfr’s Instructions
EXPOSED BUS & Test Operate
CONNECTIONS FUSES & HOLDERS
Clean and Check Porcelain Check Contact Surfaces
Insulators for Cracks or Chips Lubricate per Mfr’s Instructions
Check & Tighten Connections METERS & INSTRUMENTS
Inspect Potheads for Leaks Check Operation
Check for Environmental Test Meters per Eng. Std.
Hazards Test Relays per Eng. Std. 383
Test Insulation (Megohms) INTERLOCKS & SAFETY
METALCLAD ENCLOSURES Check for Proper Operation
Clean Check Lightning Arrestors
Check for Openings which Check Ground Detectors
Permit Dirt, Moisture & Rodent
Entrance – Repair Check Eqpt. Grounds
Check Hardware for Rust or
STATION BATTERY
Corrosion
Paint Condition Inspect to Confirm that Periodic
Check Heaters & Ventilators Routine
METALCLAD BUS & Maintenance is Performed
CONNECTIONS
Clean Insulators & Supports
Check & Tighten Connections
Check for Corona Tracking
Inspect Potheads for Leaks
Test Insulation (Megohms)
Remarks: (Record action taken when indicated by Inspection or Tests)

Recommendations:

Reprinted with permission from NFPA 70B-1983, Recommended Practice for Electrical Maintenance, Copywrite, 1983, National Fire
Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02269. This reprinted material is not the complete and official position of the NFPA on the referenced
subject which is represented only by the standard in its entirety.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 161 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Transformer Dry Type – Inspection Record

Plant Date
Location Serial No.
Year Purchased Year Installed Mfr.
KVA Voltage Impedance
Cooling System: Room Vent Fan Trans. Fans Gravity

ANNUAL INSPECTION
DATE DATE
INSPECTOR’S INITIALS INSPECTOR’S INITIALS
ELECTRICAL LOAD BUSHINGS
Cracks or Chips
SECONDARY VOLTAGE Cleanliness
No Load Volts EQUIPMENT GROUND
Full Load Volts Check Connections

DUST ON WINDINGS Measured V


Minor Collection Resistance
Major Collection TEMPERATURE ALARMS
Cleaned AND INDICATIONS
CONNECTIONS Operation
Checked Accuracy
Tightened CASE EXTERIOR
COOLING SYSTEMS Covers Intact
Fan Operation Paint Condition
Filter Cleanliness LIGHTING ARRESTORS
System Adequate Check Connections
Check Bushings

COMPLETE INTERNAL INSPECTION


Report of Conditions Found:
Cooling System
Coil Insulation
Other
Description of Work Performed:

Other Repairs Recommended:

Shop or Contractor: Cost:

Reprinted with permission from NFPA 70B-1983, Recommended Practice for Electrical Maintenance, Copywrite, 1983, National Fire
Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02269. This reprinted material is not the complete and official position of the NFPA on the referenced
subject which is represented only by the standard in its entirety.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 162 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Transformer – Liquid Filled – Inspection Record


Plant Date
Location Serial No.
Year Purchased Year Installed Mfr.
KVA Voltage Taps
Check Type: Free Breathing Conservator Sealed Fan Cooled
Phase Weight Impedance
Insulated Fluid: Type Gallons

ANNUAL INSPECTION
DATE DATE
INSPECTOR’S INITIALS INSPECTOR’S INITIALS
TANK – LIQUID LEVEL EXPOSED BUSHINGS
Normal Cracks or Chips
Below Cleanliness
Added Fluid EQUIPMENT GROUND
ENTRANCE COMPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
LIQUID LEVEL Good
Normal Questionable
Below Tested
Added Fluid TEMP INDICATOR
ELECTRICAL LOAD Highest Reading
Peak Amps Reset Pointer
SECONDARY VOLTAGE PRESSURE – VACUUM
Full Load INDICATOR
No Load Pressure
GASKETS & CASE EXTERIOR Vacuum
Liquid Leaks VENTILATORS, DRYERS,
Paint Condition GUAGES, FILTERS & OTHER
AUXILIARIES
Operation OK
Main. Req’d

Remarks: (Record action when Inspection data or tests are out of limits, etc.)

Report of Conditions Found:

Description of Work Performed:

Other Repairs Recommended:

Shop or Contractor: Cost:


Reprinted with permission from NFPA 70B-1983, Recommended Practice for Electrical Maintenance, Copywrite, 1983, National Fire
Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02269. This reprinted material is not the complete and official position of the NFPA on the referenced
subject which, is represented only by the standard in its entirety.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 163 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Transformer Insulation Resistance Record

Plant Date
Scope: Power transformers of 150 KVA and greater capacity with primary voltage of 2300 volts or higher.
Direct reading – recorded and plotted.
Transformer Serial No. Phase
Location Instrument Used
Equipment Included in Test:

II* Date Pri. to Grd Sec. to Grd. Pri. to Sec. Internal Temp. Ambient Temp

Remarks:

Reprinted with permission from NFPA 70B-1983, Recommended Practice for Electrical Maintenance, Copywrite, 1983, National Fire
Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02269. This reprinted material is not the complete and official position of the NFPA on the referenced
subject which, is represented only by the standard in its entirety.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 164 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Insulation Resistance – Dielectric Absorption Test Sheet


Power Cable

TEST NO.
COMPANY DATE
LOCATION TIME
CIRCUIT
CIRCUIT LENGTH AERIAL DUCT BURNED
NUMBER OF CONDUCTOR AWG
CONDUCTORS SIZE M.C.M. BELTED SHIELDED
INSULATING INSULATION VOLTAGE
MATERIAL THICKNESS RATING AGE
POTHEAD OR
TERMINAL TYPE LOCATION INDOORS OUTDOORS
NUMBER AND
TYPE OF JOINTS
RECENT OPERATING
HISTORY
MFR.

STATE IF POTHEADS OR
TERMINALS WERE GUARDED DURING TEST
LIST ASSOCIATES EQUIPMENT
INCLUDED IN TEST

MISC.
INFORMATION

TEST DATA – MEGOHMS


PART TEST HOURS AFTER
TESTED MADE DAYS SHUTDOWN
GROUNDING DRY-BULB
o
TIME TEMP F
TEST WET-BULB
o
VOLTAGE RULE F
TEST TO TO TO TO DEW
o
CONNECTIONS LINE LINE LINE LINE POINT F
TO TO TO TO RELATIVE
EARTH EARTH EARTH EARTH HUMIDITY %
TO TO TO TO ABSOLUTE
GUARD GUARD GUARD GUARD HUMIDITY O.R./#
EQUIPMENT
o
¼ MIN TEMP F(C)
HOW
½ MIN OBTAINED

¾ MIN

2 MIN “MEGGER” INST. -

3 MIN SERIAL #

4 MIN RANGE

5 MIN VOLTAGE

6 MIN

7 MIN

8 MIN

9 MIN

10 MIN
10/1 MIN
RATIO

REMARKS

TESTED
BY

Reprinted with permission from NFPA 70B-1983, Recommended Practice for Electrical Maintenance, Copywrite, 1983, National Fire
Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02269. This reprinted material is not the complete and official position of the NFPA on the referenced
subject which, is represented only by the standard in its entirety.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 165 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

Cable Test Sheet

COMPANY DATE JOB NO.


o
TEST LOCATION CIRCUIT AIR TEMP C % HUM.
TYPE TEST: ACCEPTANCE PERIODIC SPECIAL
DATE LAST TEST SHEET NO. WEATHER

CABLE MFR.
RATED Kv (GND., UNGND.)
OPER. Kv (GND., UNGND.)
LENGTH
AGE
NO. COND.
SIZE
INSUL. MATERIAL
INSUL. THICKNESS
INSUL. TYPE
COVERING
INSTALLED IN
FACTORY TEST Kv
MAX TEST Kv
VOLTMETER Kv

LEAKAGE CURRENT –
MICROAMPS
TIME VOLTS
MIN. Kv 1- 2- 3-

INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST


ONE MINUTE @ 2.5 Kv – 1000 MEGOHMS

TO GND.
1 TO
2 TO

AUTHORIZATION OF MAX.
TEST Kv AND VERIFYING VOLTMETER Kv

SIGNATURE

REMARKS

TEST SET NO. TESTED BY SHEET NO.


Reprinted with permission from NFPA 70B-1983, Recommended Practice for Electrical Maintenance, Copywrite, 1983, National Fire
Protection Association, Quincy, MA 02269. This reprinted material is not the complete and official position of the NFPA on the referenced
subject which, is represented only by the standard in its entirety.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 166 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

APPENDIX D: GLOSSARY OF TERMS

ACCEPTANCE TESTS: Those tests and inspections required to determine that the material
and equipment involved may be energized for final operational tests. Acceptance tests are
intended to ensure that the workmanship, methods, inspections and materials used in erection
and installation of the subject material and equipment conforms with engineering practices and
consensus standards such as IEEE, IPCEA Standards, NEMA, ANSI, NFPA, NEC, CEC, MEC,
the Purchasing Division’s and manufacturer’s instructions.

ACCESSIBLE: (As applied to wiring methods.) Capable of being removed or exposed without
damaging the building structure or finish, or not permanently closed in by the structure or finish
of the building. (See “Concealed” and “Exposed.”)

ACCESSIBLE: (As applied to equipment.) Admitting close approach: not guarded by locked
doors, elevation or other effective means. (See “Accessible, Readily.”)

ACCESSIBLE, READILY: (Readily Accessible.) Capable of being reached quickly for operation,
renewal, or inspection, without requiring those to whom ready access is requisite to climb over
or remove obstacles or to resort to portable ladders, chairs, etc. (See “Accessible.”)

AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI): The American Engineering


Standards Committee was organized in 1919 through the efforts of AEE (now IEEE), ASTM,
ASME, ASCE and AIME to simplify and standardize production and construction. In the period
since its founding, it has gone through several structural reorganizations and name changes,
having been variously known as the American Standards Institute, and currently the American
National Standards Institute. The Institute is a federation whose membership comprises
organizations who develop or participate in development of standards, and who use or are
concerned with development of American National Standards. In addition, many governmental
bodies and individual experts participate in the work of the Institute.

AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIAL (ASTM): Founded in 1898, ASTM is a
scientific and technical organization whose charter purpose is “the development of standards on
characteristics and performance of materials, products, systems and services; and the
promotion of related knowledge.” The society is a management system for the development of
standards, operating through more than 126 main technical committees that function in
prescribed fields under regulations design to provide balanced representation among producers,
users, consumers, and general-interest participants.

AMPHERES-SQUARED-SECONDS: (l2t) l2t is an expression used to measure or define the let


through energy of a fuse, in terms of current and time. All fuses classified as “current limiting
type” must meet specified maximum clearing l2t values to qualify for UL listing.

BASIC GROUND: Basic Ground shall be interpreted as the earth, or the structural metal frame
of a building. Sprinkler mains shall not be used for grounding.

BUS STRUCTURE: An assembly of bus conductors, with associated connection joints and
insulating supports.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 167 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

BUS SUPPORT: An insulating support for a bus. It includes one or more insulator units with
fittings for fastening to the mounting structure and for receiving the bus.

CONCEALED: Rendered inaccessible by the structure or finish of the building. Wires in


concealed raceways are considered concealed, even though they may become accessible by
withdrawing them [See “Accessible” – As applied to wiring methods].

CONDUIT BODIES: A separate portion of a conduit or tubing system that provides access
through a removable cover(s) to the interior of the system at a junction of two or more sections
of the system or at a terminal point of the system.

DISCONNECT SWITCH: A fused or non-fusible switch mounted in an electrical enclosure.

DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMER: A transformer in which the core and coils are in a gaseous or
dry compound-insulating medium.

EQUIPMENT GROUNDING: The purpose of equipment grounding is to provide a permanent


and continuous bonding together of conductor enclosures, equipment frames, switchgear, cable
armor, conduit, portable electric equipment, steel structures, and other non-current-carrying
parts of the system which are accessible to personnel in order to form a low impedance path to
ground.

EXPOSED: (As applied to live parts.) Capable of being inadvertently touched or approached
nearer than a safe distance by a person. It is applied to parts not suitably guarded, isolated or
insulated (See “Accessible” and “Concealed”.)

EXPOSED: (As applied to wiring methods.) On or attached to the surface behind panels
designed to allow access. [See “Accessible – As applied to wiring methods.”]

GROUND RODS: Solid cylindrical rods, ¾ inch in diameter and 15 feet or longer in length, as
required to reach specified resistance. Rods shall be of solid copper or copper clad steel, tinned
at top end for connection. D-3

INSTALLER: In the context of this document, the term “installer” refers to the Purchasing
Division designated electrical contractor or Plant Personnel responsible for the installation of
electrical material and equipment.

INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING (IEEE): Formed in 1963


through merger of the American Institute of Electrical Engineers (founded in 1884) and Institute
of Radio Engineers (founded 1912), IEEE is now the largest engineering society in the world
(over 175,000 members). It develops standards in the technical committee of its 31 professional
groups and societies in such diverse subject as broadcasting and communications, electrical
practices for large industry (mining, textiles, shipbuilding, transportation, cement plants and
others), instrumentation and measurement, insulators and insulation, magnetics, motors and
generators, nuclear power, power apparatus and systems, recording symbols and units, and
electrical transmission and distribution.

INSULATED INSERT: A thermoplastic or thermosetting material installed in conduit fittings to


protect the conductor’s insulation.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 168 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

LABELED: Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol, or other
identifying mark of an organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction and concerned
with product evaluation, that maintains periodic inspection of production of labeled equipment or
materials and by whose labeling the manufacturer indicates compliance with appropriate
standards or performance in a specified manner.

LISTED: Equipment or materials included in a list published by an organization acceptable to


the authority having jurisdiction and concerned with product evaluation, that maintains periodic
inspection of production of listed equipment or materials, and whose listing states either that the
equipment or material meets appropriate standards or has been tested and found suitable for
use in a specified manner.

MOTOR CONTROLLER: A device or group of devices that serves to govern, in some


predetermined manner, the electric power delivered to the motor or group of motors to which it
is connected.

NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC): Establishes the minimum standards of wiring design
and installation practice in the United States. Its rules are written to protect the public from fire
and life hazards. It is revised periodically by a committee drawn from industry associations,
insurance groups, organized labor and representatives of municipalities. It is sponsored by the
National Fire Protection Association, and approved by the American National Standards
Institute. It forms the basis of the vast majority of municipal electrical wiring ordinances, which
adopt successive editions of the Code as issued.

THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA): NFPA has


been active in standards development since it founding in 1896. Working under the direction of
its Standard Council, the technical committees of NFPA, composed of organization
representatives, personal members, and liaison members from other technical committees,
develop standards documents that are then subject to public review as a result of advance
publication, and are finally approved at a semiannual meeting of the entire NFPA membership.
Although dedicated to fire prevention, NFPA is responsible for a series of electrical standards,
the most noted of which is the National Electrical Code.

OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (OSHA): OSHA was


established as a division of the U.S. Department of Labor though enactment in 1970 by
Congress of the Occupational Safety and Health Act. This established, within the Department of
Labor, a responsibility for occupational safety in the workplace, as distinguished from public
safety. During its first year of operations, OSHA was empowered to adopt as regulations
existing standards which had been developed under national consensus procedures.

OUTLET BOX: Electrical equipment made of sheet or cast metal, which is used to enclose
switching devices and receptacles outlets rated below 300 volts.

PEAK LET-THROUGH CURRENT (lp): The peak let through current is the maximum
instantaneous peak current which passes through the fuse during the total clearing time. All
fuses classified as “current limiting” or “current limiting type” must meet specified maximum
peak let-through current values to qualify for UL listing.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 169 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

PURCHASING DIVISION: The General Motors Divisional/Plant Representatives(s) responsible


for the procurement, operation and maintenance of the machinery and equipment.

RECEPTACLE (CONVENIENCE OUTLET): A contact device installed at an outlet for the


connection of an attachment plug and flexible cord to supply portable equipment.

STARTING-SWITCH ASSEMBLY: The make and break contact, mechanical linkage, and
mounting parts necessary for starting or running, or both starting and running, split-phase and
capacitor-start motors. The starting-switch assembly must consist of a stationary-contact
assembly and a contact that moves with the rotor.

SYSTEM GROUNDING: The intentional grounding of one conductor of the system to limit the
maximum potential value to ground due to normal operating voltage and to limit the voltage level
on the system due to lightning or other abnormal conditions. The neutral point of the transformer
or generator is usually the point-connected ground. In addition to the control of system
overvoltages, intentional electric system neutral grounding makes possible sensitive and speedy
fault protection based on detention of ground current flow. Grounded systems, in most cases,
are arranged so that circuit protective devices will remove faulty circuits from the system
regardless of the type of fault. Any contact from phase to ground in the grounded system thus
results in immediate isolation of the faulty circuit and its loads.

UNDERWRITERS’ LABORATORIES, INCORPORATED (UL): Founded in 1894, UL is an


independent, not-for-profit organization which maintains and operates laboratories for testing of
devices, systems and materials with relation to public safety. Products so tested and meeting its
requirements are eligible for UL listed “listing”. UL maintains an inspection and follow-up
program in factories where UL listed devices are manufactured. UL representatives conduct in-
factory and in-the-field inspections of manufacturers’ procedures for assuring production
compliance with UL requirements. Such requirements appear in appropriate UL Standards for
Safety which are developed by UL under procedures that involve consultation with industry and
government experts and consumers, among others.

WIREWAY: A sheet metal trough with hinged or removable covers for housing and protection
of electrical wires and cables and in which conductors are laid in place after the wireway has
been installed as a complete system.

WEATHERPROOF: A NEMA 4 type enclosure required for electrical equipment in wet or damp
locations, and subject to corrosive environments. Refer to the National Equipment
Manufacturers Association (NEMA) specifications on NEMA 4 construction.

Exception: Outdoor busway shall be weatherproof as defined by the busway manufacturer.

VOLTAGE, LOW: 600 volts and below.

VOLTAGE, MEDIUM: 601 - 35,000 volts.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 170 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

APPENDIX E: EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS

E3.1 BUSWAY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

E3.1.1 General

E3.1.1.1. All busway systems, including trolley busway and lighting busway, shall be UL
labeled and shall comply with all applicable standards, including, but not limited to,
the following:

1. UL Standard 857 – Busways and Associated Fittings


2. ANSI Standard for Cranes and Hoist Electrification Systems
3. NEMA BU-1
4. GM Equipment Specification, 13E, 600 Volt Sandwich Type Busway.

E3.1.2 Industrial Trolley Busway

E3.1.2.1. Industrial trolley busway shall be heavy duty, 600 volt, with busway sections
shaped in the form of a channel from single piece of minimum 14 gauge steel
designed to ensure a rigid and symmetrical busway section.

E3.1.2.2. All bus bars shall be copper and shall be mounted against the sides and top of the
formed channels so that there is an insulated steel backing throughout the entire
length to prevent the bending of bus bars from pressure of current collectors.

E3.1.2.3. Bus connectors for the electrical and mechanical joining of bus bars shall be
provided for installation at each busway section joint.

E3.1.2.4. A feed-in adapter box shall be provided for each trolley busway run and shall be
designed so as not to interfere with continuous travel of trolley current collect.

E3.1.2.5. End plates with bumper attachments shall be used to terminate busway runs and
to prevent damage to trolleys.

E3.1.2.6. Trolley busways and trolleys shall be polarized to permit trolley insertion in only
one way.

E3.1.2.7. Trolleys shall be designed to move freely in the busway with a smooth motion of
the carriage and with accurate alignment and positive electrical connection at the
contract pressure points.

E3.1.2.8. Trolleys shall have sealed ball bearing trust and guide wheels.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 163 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

E3.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

E3.2.1 General

E3.2.1.1 This standard specifies the application, rating and special performance
requirements for disconnect switches rated 600 volts AC and below. This applies
but is not limited to the following uses:

1. Main disconnect switches used in control panel enclosures. Refer to the SAE
Standard for Electrical Equipment for Automotive Industrial Machinery, 2002
Edition, SAE HS-1738, for additional requirements.
2. Safety switches.
3. Disconnect switches used in combination motor starters, motor control
centers, adjustable speed drives, and soft starters. Refer to GM
Specifications 12E Motor Control Centers and Combination Motor Starters;
12E-ASD 480-Volt Adjustable Speed Drives; and 12E-SS 480-Volt Soft
Starters for additional requirements.
4. Disconnect switches used in panelboards.
5. Disconnect switches used in combination with power receptacles.
6. Bus plug disconnect switches Refer to GM Specification 13E Busway for
additional requirements.

E3.2.1.2 Switches shall be rated 600-volt AC and shall be three poles, horsepower rated,
quick-make, quick-break, heavy-duty industrial type with visible blades and no
exposed live parts in the open position.

E3.2.1.3 All fusible horsepower rated disconnect switches shall conform to the requirements
listed NEMA Standard KS-1 for heavy duty (type HD) enclosed switches and UL
Standard 98 for enclosed switches.

E3.2.1.4 Enclosure: Disconnect switches shall be fusible switches in NEMA 12 enclosure


without knockouts, unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental
conditions of installed location.

1. Kitchen areas, cooling towers, etc.: NEMA Type 4 stainless steel or 4X.
2. Other wet or damp locations: NEMA Type 4 stainless steel or NEMA Type
12/3R.
3. Hazardous areas: Type 7, or as required.
4. Office areas: NEMA 1.

E3.2.1.5 Enclosure: Safety switches shall be NEMA 12 enclosure without knockouts, unless
otherwise specified or required to meet environmental conditions of installed
location.

E3.2.1.6 All current carrying parts of the switch shall be high conductivity copper, and all
electrical connections shall be metal to metal only. No insulation material shall be
used in the pressure system of a joint.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 164 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

E3.2.1.7 The design and construction of the operating mechanism shall be such as to insure
ample strength and rigidity. Screws and nuts serving to attach operating parts to
crossbars or other movable members shall be staked, upset of otherwise locked in
position to prevent any possibility of loosening from vibration and mechanical
shock. Mechanical stops shall be provided so as to remove undue strain from
switch parts.

E3.2.1.8 All lug terminals shall be in accordance with Section 6, Low Voltage Wiring.

E3.2.1.9 Disconnect switches shall be fusible unless otherwise noted.

E3.2.1.10 All fusible devices shall be furnished with UL approved rejection type fuse clips.
The fuse clip current carrying parts shall be copper alloy. These clips shall be of
such design that they shall accept the specified Class J or Class RK fuses. In
addition, after a switch is installed, it shall not be possible to modify Class R or
Class J type fuse clips with the use of ordinary hand tools in such a way as to
permit the insertion of unapproved fuses. Clips that are designed to accept only
one manufacturer’s fuse shall not be acceptable.

E3.2.1.11 The disconnect means shall be interlocked mechanically with the enclosure door. A
suitable device operated by a screwdriver or other common hand tool shall be
provided so that the interlocks may be by passed and the enclosure door opened
without disconnecting the power. Interlocking shall be reactivated automatically
when the enclosure door is closed.

E3.2.1.12 Mechanical interlocking shall be provided between the disconnecting means and
its associated door to accomplish the following:

1. Prevent closing of the disconnecting means while the enclosure door is open,
unless an interlock is operated.

2. Prevent closing of the disconnecting means until the door is in the fully closed
position and the door hardware fully engaged.

E3.2.1.13 The operating handle of the disconnecting means shall be of the flange-mounted
type and be accessible.

E3.2.1.14 The operating handle of the disconnecting means shall be such that is can only be
padlocked in the off position. Provisions shall be made for a minimum of three
locks having shackles 5/16 inch in diameter or smaller and one inch or greater in
length. The design shall be such that the switch cannot be closed when locked
open by a single padlock.

E3.2.1.15 The operating handle shall plainly indicate at all times whether the disconnecting
means is in the open or closed position. The operating arm shall be in the down
position for “off” indication.

E3.2.1.16 The mechanical linkage between the disconnecting means and its operating
handle shall be such that the operating handle is in control of the disconnect at all
times. Door mounted disconnect handles shall not be acceptable.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 165 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

E3.2.2 Special Switch Testing Requirements for Manufacturers

E3.2.2.1 The requirements of this standard are all–inclusive. All tests required by UL shall
have written certification of compliance with these requirements signed by the
engineering manager of the equipment manufacturer. Upon request of the
Purchase Division, such certification shall be submitted including copies of data for
tests demonstrating conformance performed on equipment of identical construction
and design.

E3.2.2.2 All equipment shall conform to all applicable NEMA and UL Standards and shall be
certified by an independent recognized test agency.

E3.2.2.3 All switches shall be rated and labeled as follows:


1. Non-Fusible Switches
a. Voltage
b. Current
c. Horsepower rated per NEMA Standards
2. Fusible Switches
a. Voltage
b. Current
c. Horsepower rated per NEMA Standard
d. Withstand rated per UL (with rejection type RK fuses).

E3.2.2.4 The test circuit used for the performance of the special testing required in this
section shall conform to that described for the “Withstand Tests” and Closing
Tests” in UL 98, Enclosed Switches. A schematic diagram of the actual test circuit
used shall be included as a part of the certification.

E3.2.2.5 For purposed of this testing, a source shall be used having a minimum of 100,000
amps RMS symmetrical, 600 volts, 60 hertz, at a maximum of 20 percent power
factor available at the line side of the switch.

E3.2.2.6 The switch shall be subjected to an I-peak and I2t of no less than the values listed
in the table below. Refer also to UL 98, Enclosed and Dead-front Switches, and UL
198E, Class R Fuses.
Table E3-1
I-Peak and I2t Test Requirements

Switch Ampere Rating l2t x 103 lpeak x 103

30 50 11
60 200 21
100 500 25
200 1,600 40
400 5,000 60
600 10,000 80

Template Revised 5-06 Page 166 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

E3.2.2.7 The switch shall be subjected to an I-peak and 12t of no less than the values listed
in the table below. Refer also to UL 98, Enclosed and Dead-front Switches, and UL
198E, Class R Fuses.

E3.2.2.8 Fuses shall be mounted inside the device (unless non-fusible) but if a larger
ampere rating fuse is required, the fuse may be installed outside the switch
enclosure and on the load side of the disconnect. An appropriate copper dummy
fuse shall be installed in the fuse clips having a cross sectional area no smaller
than the largest fuse intended for use with that switch. If the fuse is a size, which is
of the blade-type construction, the cross-section area of the dummy fuse shall, as a
minimum, be equal to that of the actual size fuse blade.

E3.2.2.9 Under the conditions described above, the switch shall be considered to have
passed the test requirements if the following condition are met:

1. There shall be no breakage of the switch base to the extent that the integrity
of the mounting of live parts is impaired.

2. Neither end of a bar or tube used as a “Dummy Fuse” shall be completely


ejected from the fuse clip and the line end of these bars or tubes shall not
bridge from a fuse clip to dead metal.

3. The door shall be prevented from opening by its latch, without bolt or lock
installed therein. (Deformation of the case alone is not considered to
constitute failure.)

4. The switch shall be capable of being opened and re-closed manually with the
operating handle at the conclusion of the test.

E3.3 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

E3.3.1. Multiple capacitor cells or elements shall be factory wired in 3-phase groups and
mounted in metal enclosures.

E3.3.2. Capacitor cells shall be dry metallized-dielectric, self-healing type. Each cell shall
be encapsulated in thermosetting resin inside a plastic container.

E3.3.3. Provide a pressure-sensitive interrupter for each cell.

E3.3.4. Capacitor bank fuses shall be current-limiting, non-interchangeable type, factory


installed in each phase and located within the equipment enclosure. Features shall
include the following:

E3.3.5. Capacitor fuses shall have a 200,000 ampere minimum interrupting capacity.

E3.3.6. Fuse ratings and characteristics shall be as recommended by capacitor


manufacturer.

E3.3.7. Connect neon lamp to each fuse to illuminate when fuse has opened, and locate
so it is visible from outside the outermost enclosure.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 167 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

E3.3.8. Capacitor enclosures shall be NEMA 250, steel or aluminum, arranged to contain
the fluid leakage from capacitor cells. Enclosure shall be factory equipped with
mounting brackets suitable for type of mounting indicated. Enclosure types shall be
as follows:

E3.3.9. Indoor enclosures shall be Type 12 or as indicated.

E3.3.10. Outdoor enclosures shall be Type 4 equipped with watertight conduit connections.

E3.3.11. Fixed capacitors shall be integrally fused, unless otherwise indicated, with
quantities, ratings, mounting provisions, and electrical connections as indicated.

E3.3.12. Fixed capacitors shall have three discharge resistors per cell factory installed and
wired.

E3.3.13. Fixed capacitors shall be factory wired, ready for field connection to external
circuits at a single set of pressure terminals.

E3.4 FUSIBLE PANELBOARDS

E3.4.1 General

E3.4.1.1. All fusible panelboards shall comply with NEMA Standard PB-1; NFPA 70 (NEC);
and UL Standards UL 50, UL 67, and UL 98.

E3.4.1.2. Fusible panelboards shall be of the combination switch and fuse type with dead
front safety construction, NEMA 12 in factory areas and NEMA 1 in office areas,
unless otherwise noted, with trim covering wiring gutters only. Equip trim on
surface mounted panels in factory areas and all flush mounted panels with an
overall hinged door having a flush latch and cylinder lock. Key all locks alike or to
the existing master system. Galvanize or phosphatize and prime and finish paint all
surfaces with manufacturer’s standard finish. Galvanize all recessed boxes.
Provide a heavy plastic covered metal frame cardholder and card on individual
compartments. All switches shall be as specified in Appendix E Section 2,
Equipment Specification for Disconnect Switches.

E3.4.1.3. Panelboard interiors shall be designed so that units can be replaced without
disturbing adjacent units and without removing main bus or branch circuit
connections. Circuits shall be capable of being changed without drilling or tapping.
When future fusible switches designated as “space” are noted, equip the
panelboard with bus and minimum hardware ready to receive future fusible
switches. Furnish a blank removable spacer plate to cover the “space” until future
use.

E3.4.1.4. Each individual switch compartment shall have a hinged door interlocked with the
operating handle. Provide an external operating handle for the switch and
positively interlock with the cover door such that the cover door cannot be opened
unless the switch is in the “off” position. Provide means for padlocking the
operating handle in the “off” position with a minimum of three 5/16 inch shackle
padlocks such that when the operating handle is padlocked in the “off” position, the
cover door cannot be opened and the switch cannot be closed. The design shall
be such that the switch cannot be closed when locked in the open position by a
single padlock.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 168 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

E3.4.1.5. Panelboards shall have bus bars of 98 percent conductivity copper, sized to result
in a maximum current density of 155 amperes per square cm (1000 amperes per
square inch), and silver or tinplated at connections. Unless otherwise specified by
the Purchasing Division, panelboards shall be 3 phase, 3 wire or 4 wire with solid
neutral, and supplied with an equipment ground bus the full length of panelboard in
the enclosure. Mains and risers shall be full capacity and untapered throughout
their lengths. Provide a full ampacity insulated copper neutral bus, arranged for
connection of incoming and outgoing neutral wiring, with suitable lugs for each
circuit position, including spares and spaces, when indicated. Furnish incoming line
bus arrangement for connection of wiring entering from above or below as
indicated. Provide factory applied, flame retardant bus bar insulation of individual
bus bars, 105 deg C (220 deg F) minimum, by fluidized bed process, tape
wrapping, or flame retardant spray.

E3.4.1.6. Panelboards shall be rated 600 volts, 60 Hz, with short circuit bracing of at least
65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes at 480 volts.

E3.4.1.7. Fusible panelboards shall be equipped with a main switch or main lugs only and
with the number, size and types of branch fusible switches required, in accordance
with the contract documents.

E3.5 CIRCUIT BREAKER PANELBOARDS

E3.5.1 General

E3.5.1.1. All circuit breaker panelboards shall comply with NEMA Standards AB-1, KS-1, and
PB-1; NFPA 70 (NEC); UL Standards UL 50, UL 67, UL 98, and UL 489; CSA
standards; and ANCE standards as appropriate.

E3.5.1.2. Enclosures shall be NEMA 12 without knockouts in plant areas and may be NEMA
1 in office areas.

E3.5.1.3. Circuit breaker panelboards shall have voltage ratings and number of phases as
shown in the contract documents. All panels shall be provided with an equipment
ground bus connected to the system ground. A neutral bus shall be provided for all
systems utilizing neutral circuit conductors.

E3.5.1.4. Circuit breaker panelboards shall be dead front safety type, with main circuit
breaker or main lugs only and with the number of types of branch circuit breakers
required, in accordance with the contract documents.

E3.5.1.5. Each panel shall be enclosed in a standard width or narrow column type, surface
or flush mounting metal cabinet with trim and door, as indicated in the contract
documents.

E3.5.1.6. Column type panels shall have a metal raceway interconnecting with a junction box
located at the truss elevation. The junction box shall be provided with neutral
terminal, captive hardware and a hinged cover. Divided raceways shall be provided
on panels having space for more than 27 branch circuit breakers.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 169 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

E3.5.1.7. Panels shall have bus bars of 98 percent conductivity copper and silver or tin
plated at connections. Line and load connections shall conform to the requirements
of Section 6, Low Voltage Wiring. Panels shall be fastened into cabinets.

E3.5.1.8. Circuit breaker panelboards shall be rated in accordance with Section 4.2 or 4.3
unless otherwise stated in the contract documents. Shop drawings shall provide
complete panelboard ratings.

E3.5.1.9. Circuit breaker shall be removable and interchangeable industrial type, in


quantities, voltage rating, ampere rating and number of poles as indicated in the
contract documents. Circuit breaker shall be ambient compensated, thermal
magnetic type automatic overload trip and identified with a circuit number in
accordance with standard practice. Circuit breakers shall be of the quick make,
quick-break type. Half size or tandem circuit breakers shall not be permitted.

E3.5.1.10. Branch circuit breakers used for switching shall be rated and marked SWD
(Switching Duty) in accordance with applicable UL, NEC, CEC, or MEC
requirements. Multi-pole circuit breakers shall be installed to serve load, which are
connected, phase-to-phase. Circuit breakers feeding locally switched areas,
receptacle circuits, and night light circuits shall be provided with snap-on the
locking devices.

E3.5.1.11. Cabinets, standard metal raceways, trim and doors shall be constructed of code
gauge sheet steel. Trim shall be complete with concealed full length piano hinges,
door with concealed flush hinges, flush catch with keyed lock and a directory
frame on the inside of the door with a plastic cover. All locks shall be keyed alike
and shall match the Purchasing Division’s keying system.

E3.5.2 Panelboards Rated 277 Volts And Above

E3.5.2.1. Circuit breaker panelboards rated 277 volts and above shall have bolt-on type
circuit breakers.

E3.5.2.2. Circuit breaker panelboards rated 277 volts and above shall be fully rated for a
minimum of 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC. Breakers shall have a
65,000-ampere interrupting capability at 480 VAC.
Exception No. 1: Branch circuit breakers may be UL series rated with the 65,000
ampere-rated main breaker, only if approved by the Purchasing Division.
Exception No. 2: When connected to a 75 KVA or smaller transformer, the
panelboard and circuit breakers may be rated 14,000 RMS symmetrical amperes
at 480 VAC.

E3.5.3 Panelboards Rated 240 Volts And Below

E3.5.3.1. Circuit breaker panelboards rated 240 volts and below shall have plug-in type
circuit breakers, unless otherwise specified by Purchasing Division.

E3.5.3.2. Circuit breaker panelboards and circuit breakers rated for the available system
short circuit current, but in no case less than 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 170 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

E3.5.4 DC Panelboards
E3.5.4.1. Circuit breaker panelboards used on DC systems shall be UL listed for the
application. Circuit breakers shall have a DC rating.

E3.5.5 Intelligent Circuit Breaker Panelboards

E3.5.5.1. Intelligent circuit breaker panelboards shall be dead front safety type, per NEMA
Standard PB-1 and UL 67 with main circuit breaker as indicated including branch
circuit breakers, microprocessor based controller, power supply and control bus
strips for 42 branch circuit breakers all in a flush or surface mounted steel cabinet
and 36 branch circuit breakers in a column width steel cabinet as indicated.
Panelboards shall be suitable for remote control of the branch circuit breakers.

E3.5.5.2. Bus ampere rating shall be 100 amperes or 225 amperes, as indicated on the
drawings.

E3.5.5.3. Circuit breaker panelboards rated 480Y/277V and above shall be fully rated for a
minimum of 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes at 480V. Breakers shall have a
65,000-ampere interrupting capability at 480V.

Exception: When connected to a 75 KVA or smaller transformer, the panelboard and circuit
breakers may be rated 14,000 RMS symmetrical amperes at 480 VAC. Circuit
breakers shall be bolt-on in either case.

E3.5.5.4. Circuit breaker panelboards rated 208Y/120V shall be rated for a minimum of
65,000RMS symmetrical amperes. Main and branch circuit breakers shall have an
Interrupting rating of 65,000 RMS amperes. Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type.

E3.5.5.5. Provide circuit breakers in quantities, voltage rating, and number of poles indicated.
Circuit breakers shall be either the standard industrial type or motor operated and
controlled individually or in groups with the capability of monitoring breaker position
remotely. Circuit breakers shall be quick-make, quick-break with trip free operating
handle, position indication, and common trip from thermal magnetic trip device.
Circuit breakers shall be ambient compensated, thermal magnetic type, automatic
overload trip and identified with a circuit number in accordance with standard
practice. Half size or tandem circuit breakers shall not be permitted. Branch circuit
breakers shall be rated and marked (SWD) switching duty in accordance with UL
and NEC requirements. Multi-pole circuit breakers shall be installed to serve loads
which are connected phase-to-phase.

E3.5.5.6. Enclosures shall be NEMA 12 without knockouts in plant areas and may be NEMA
1 in office areas.

E3.5.5.7. Each panel shall be enclosed in a standard width or narrow column type, surface
or flush mounting metal cabinet with trim and door, as indicated in the contract
documents.

E3.5.5.8. Column type panels shall have a metal raceway interconnecting with a junction box
located at the truss elevation. The junction box shall be provided with neutral
terminal, captive hardware and a hinged cover. Divided raceways shall be provided
on panels having space for more than 27 branch circuit breakers.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 171 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

E3.5.5.9. Cabinets, standard metal raceways, trim and doors shall be constructed of code
gauge sheet steel. Trim shall be complete with concealed full length piano hinges,
door with concealed flush hinges, flush catch with keyed lock and a directory
frame on the inside of the door with a plastic cover. All locks shall be keyed alike
and shall match the Purchasing Division’s keying system.

E3.5.5.10. Panelboards shall have bus bars of 98 percent conductivity copper and silver or
tinplated at connections. Provide an equipment ground bus the full length of the
panelboard connected to the system ground. Provide an oversized neutral bus.

E3.5.5.11. When future circuit breakers designated as “space” are noted, equip the
panelboard with bus and minimum hardware ready to receive future circuit
breakers. Furnish a blank removable spacer plate to cover the “space’ until future
use.

E3.5.5.12. Provide an Ethernet Gateway with the capability of communicating with the
General Electric Cimplicity System. (Maximum distance between Master and Slave
panels is 400 feet; maximum distance between Master panels is 10,000 feet).

E3.6 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS AND MINI-LOAD CENTERS

E3.6.1 Dry-Type Transformers

E3.6.1.1. Dry-type transformers shall be three-phase 480-208/120 volts delta-wye connected,


three phase 480-480/277 volts delta-wye connected, or single phase, 480-240/120
volts, 60 hertz and of KVA ratings required or as indicated in the contract
documents.

E3.6.1.2. Transformers shall be two-winding, freestanding, metal enclosed non-ventilated


type, for environments such as the plant floor of Powertrain facilities (i.e., engine or
transmission plants and casting operations), press metal basements, or other
environments with airborne contaminants.

Exception: Open ventilated type transformers may be used in clean environments


unless otherwise specified by the PURCHASING DIVISION.

E3.6.1.3. Transformers serving computer facilities or sensitive electronic equipment shall be


electrostatically shielded.

E3.6.1.4. Transformers shall have a Class 220 insulation system with a maximum 115
degrees Celsius temperature rise rating over a 40 degrees Celsius ambient
temperature.

E3.6.1.5. The temperature at the top of the case shall not exceed 90 degrees Celsius when
continuously carrying the full nameplate current in a 40 degree Celsius ambient
temperature.

E3.6.1.6. Transformers shall be equipped with integral lifting provisions and shall be
designed for floor, wall, or suspended installation, indoor or outdoor, as required or
indicated in the contract documents.

E3.6.1.7. Transformer field wiring connection terminal points shall be copper.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 172 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

E3.6.1.8. Sufficient space shall be provided for 75 degrees Celsius rated copper conductors.
A separate wiring compartment with bolted cover shall be provided, to separate
field terminations from the windings.

E3.6.1.9. Transformers rated 30 KVA and less shall be provided with a minimum of two (2) 5
percent full capacity taps below rated voltage in the primary.

E3.6.1.10. Transformers rated greater than 30 KVA shall be provided with a minimum of four
(4) 2 ½ percent full capacity taps below rated voltage in the primary.

E3.6.1.11. The average audible sound level shall not exceed 45db for transformers rated 50
KVA and below and shall not exceed 50 KVA when measured in accordance with
NEMA Standard ST-20.

E3.6.2 Mini-Load Centers

E3.6.2.1. A mini-load center shall consist of a transformer, primary and secondary main
circuit breaker, and secondary branch circuit breakers, all factory assembled and
wired in a single (weatherproof) enclosure designed for wall mounting.

E3.6.2.2. The KVA and voltage rating of the transformer, number of phases, number of
branch circuits and sizes and number of poles of branch circuit breakers shall be
as shown in the contract documents. Transformers shall be dry type, 115 degrees
Celsius rise, 60 hertz, either 480-208/120 volt, three phases, or 480-240/120 volt,
single phase, and shall have a minimum of two (2) five percent full capacity taps
below rated primary voltage.

E3.6.2.3. Mini-load center field wiring connection terminal points shall be copper.

E3.6.2.4. Primary main breakers shall be UL series rates for use on a circuit with 100,000
RMS symmetrical amperes available at 480 volts, when protected by an umbrella
Class RK-5, 200 ampere fuse. Shop drawings shall include published data from the
manufacturer verifying this rating.

E3.6.2.5. Mini-load centers shall be protected on the primary side by a Class RK-5 fuse no
larger than 200 amperes.

E3.6.2.6. All secondary circuit breakers shall have a minimum interrupting capability of
10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes at rated voltage.

E3.6.2.7. All secondary circuit breakers shall be plug-in type.

E3.7 WIRING DEVICES

E3.7.1 Receptacles

E3.7.1.1. Single and duplex, 15 and 20 ampere, 125-volt straight blade receptacles shall be
back and side wired devices with a nylon face and a one-piece wraparound
mounting strap. The quality of the receptacles shall be a minimum specification
grade, 5262 or 5362 series device.

E3.7.1.2. Receptacles shall meet the applicable requirements of UL, CSA, NEMA WD1 and
Federal Specification WC 596. Devices shall provide assured grounding means in

Template Revised 5-06 Page 173 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

accordance with NEC Article 250-146(B), CEC Section 10-906 or MEC as


applicable.

E3.7.1.3. General use receptacles shall be duplex, two pole, three wire, polarized, grounding
type convenience outlets rated 20 amperes 125 volts.

E3.7.1.4. Ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles shall be the two outlet type with nylon
face, rated 20 amperes and shall be listed by UL and shall comply with UL 943-
2003, NEMA Standard WD1-4.02, Class A requirements. Ground fault circuit
interrupter receptacles shall be designed to detect current leakages as low as five
plus or minus one milliamperes and furnished complete with test and reset buttons,
mounting plates, etc. as required for a complete installation.

E3.7.1.5. Explosion-proof receptacles with integral switches for 120 volt single phase service
shall be straight blade, 3 pole, 2 wire, rated 20 amperes, 125 volts. Rotation of plug
shall activate to “ON” position after plug insertion and “OFF” position during plug
removal. Receptacle shall be suitable for N.E.C. Class 1, Division 1 hazardous
location and shall comply with UL Standard 1010 and 894. Matching plug shall also
fit ordinary location receptacles but ordinary location plug shall not activate
explosion-proof receptacle. Receptacle shall have neoprene gasketed, spring
loaded cover and shall be mounted in malleable iron box with 3/4” conduit hub(s).

E3.7.2 Switches

E3.7.2.1 Toggle switches or key-operated switches of the correct type, single pole, double
pole, three-way, etc., shall be provided, installed, and connected for each specific
application as required or indicated in the contract documents.

E3.7.2.2 Switches shall be quiet type, rated 20 amperes, 120/277 volts AC only. Switches
shall be flush type and be capable of back and side wiring. The bridge mounting
straps shall be of one-piece construction with assured grounding means in
accordance with NEC Article 250-146(B), CEC Section 10-400 items d & e or MEC
as applicable. The quality level shall be a minimum of 1220 series – 1221 (single
pole), 1222 (double pole), 1223 (three way).

E3.7.2.3 Pilot Lights shall be provided in conjunction with toggle switches in locations as
shown in the contract documents. Pilot lights shall be flush neon type rated 1/25
watt at 125 volts or 1/6 watt at 277 volts and provided with an appropriate metallic
cover plate.

E3.7.2.4 Switches shall meet the applicable requirements of UL 20, CSA, NEMA, and
Federal Specification WS-896.

E3.7.2.5 Switches for installation in metal partitions shall be quiet flush mounted
interchangeable type, rated 20 amperes, 120/277 volts.

E3.7.3 Cover Plates

E3.7.3.1 In unfinished areas, cover plates shall be stamped aluminum, or as specified in the
contract documents.

E3.7.3.2 In finished areas, cover plates for switches, receptacles, telephone or CRT outlets,
microphone, or projector jacks, etc. shall be type 302 satin finish stainless steel

Template Revised 5-06 Page 174 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

with beveled edge and shall be of the same manufacturer as the wiring device, or
as specified in the contract documents.

E3.7.3.3 In wet or moist areas and outdoors, cover plates shall be a weatherproof type, UL
listed rain tight NEMA 3R cover. Assembly shall be clearly marked “Suitable for
Wet Locations While in Use”.

E3.7.3.4 Cover plates for multiple gang boxes shall be of one-piece construction.

E3.8 LUMINAIRES

E3.8.1 General

E3.8.1.1. All lighting luminaires shall be UL, CSA, or ANCE listed and labeled for the specific
application as appropriate. Luminaire ballasts shall be UL/CSA listed and labeled
and conform to the requirements of General Motors 8E series of equipment
specifications for luminaires 8E, Industrial Luminaries and shall comply with GM
Corporate Lighting Standard NAO 0066.

E3.8.1.2. Luminaires shall not contain silicone material.

E3.8.2 Fluorescent Fixtures Luminaires

E3.8.2.1. Unless otherwise indicated, ballasts shall be high frequency, full light output type
and shall comply with GM Document “Electrical Equipment Specification No. 8E-
BAL. All ballasts for each luminaire type shall be of the same type.

E3.8.3 High Intensity Discharge (Hid) Fixtures Luminaires

E3.8.3.1 Metal halide lamps shall only be used with enclosed luminaires. The luminaire
manufacturer shall be required to provide a luminaire design to contain the hot
quartz particles upon non-passive failure of the lamp. The luminaire shall be
designed to prevent the escape of ultraviolet radiation if the outer bulb of the lamp
is broken.

E3.8.3.2 HID luminaires shall comply with 8E-HID1 (interior).

E3.8.4 Exterior Lighting

E3.8.4.1 Luminaires and poles shall comply with 8E-HID2 (exterior) as applicable.

E3.8.4.2 Pole foundations shall be designed by a structural engineer and based on WFG
standard electrical detail E-DETL-LITE-0008.

E3.8.5 Lamps

E3.8.5.1 Incandescent lamps shall be: 130 volts extended service, 2500 hours rated life,
inside frosted, except where otherwise indicated or specified in the luminaire
specification or schedule. Provide sizes as indicated or specified in the luminaire
specification or schedule.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 175 EI-1-July06.doc


Electrical Installation Standards EI-1 July, 2006
General Motors Corporation Worldwide Facilities Group Capital Projects

E3.8.5.2 Fluorescent lamps shall be: Type F-4100K, minimum CRI of 7285, and minimum
rated life of 20,000 hours at 3 hours per start, unless otherwise indicated or
specified in the luminaire specification or schedule.

E3.8.5.3 Compact Fluorescent lamps shall be: 4100 K, minimum CRI of 75, and minimum
rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours per start, unless otherwise indicated or
specified in the luminaire specification or schedule.

E3.8.5.4 Metal Halide lamps shall be: 3600 K, minimum CRI of 70, unless otherwise
indicated or specified in the luminaire specification or schedule. Provide high
output (minimum of 37,000 lumens for 350W and minimum of 42,000 lumens for
400W) pulse start lamp for 350W and 400W applications3600 K, minimum CRI of
70, unless otherwise indicated or specified in the luminaire specification or
schedule. Provide high output (minimum 42,000 lumen) pulse start lamp for 400W
applications.

E3.8.5.5 High Pressure Sodium lamps shall be: ANSI Code as specified in the luminaire
specification or schedule.

Template Revised 5-06 Page 176 EI-1-July06.doc

Potrebbero piacerti anche